Nortel Networks Digital Camera P7000 User Manual

DIGITAL CAMERA  
User’s Manual  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For Your Safety  
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others, read  
the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment.  
Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the product will read them.  
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed  
in this section are indicated by the following symbol:  
This icon marks warnings, information that should be read before using this Nikon  
product, to prevent possible injury.  
WARNINGS  
Turn off in the event of  
malfunction  
Do not use the camera or  
Battery Charger in the  
presence of flammable gas  
Should you notice smoke or an unusual  
smell coming from the camera or  
Battery Charger, unplug the Battery  
Charger and remove the battery  
immediately, taking care to avoid burns.  
Continued operation could result in  
injury. After removing or disconnecting  
the power source, take the equipment  
to a Nikon-authorized service  
Do not use electronic equipment in the  
presence of flammable gas, as this  
could result in explosion or fire.  
Do not look at the sun through  
the viewfinder  
Viewing the sun or other strong light  
source through the viewfinder could  
cause permanent visual impairment.  
representative for inspection.  
Handle the camera strap with  
care  
Never place the strap around the neck  
of an infant or child.  
Do not disassemble  
Touching the internal parts of the  
camera or Battery Charger could result  
in injury. Repairs should be performed  
only by qualified technicians. Should  
the camera or Battery Charger break  
open as the result of a fall or other  
accident, take the product to a Nikon-  
authorized service representative for  
inspection, after unplugging the  
product and/or removing the battery.  
Keep out of reach of children  
Particular care should be taken to  
prevent infants from putting the  
battery or other small parts into their  
mouths.  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
For Your Safety  
Observe caution when handling  
the battery  
The battery may leak or explode if  
improperly handled. Observe the  
following precautions when handling  
the battery for use in this product:  
If liquid from the damaged battery  
comes in contact with clothing or  
skin, rinse immediately with plenty of  
water.  
Observe the following precautions  
when handling the Battery  
Before replacing the battery, turn the  
product off. If you are using an AC  
adapter, be sure it is unplugged.  
Use only a Rechargeable Li-ion  
Battery EN-EL14 (supplied). Charge  
the battery by inserting it in a Battery  
Charger MH-24 (supplied).  
When inserting the battery, do not  
attempt to insert it upside down or  
backwards.  
Do not short or disassemble the  
battery or attempt to remove or  
break the battery insulation or casing.  
Do not expose the battery to flame  
or to excessive heat.  
Charger  
Keep dry. Failure to observe this  
precaution could result in fire or  
electric shock.  
Dust on or near the metal parts of  
the plug should be removed with a  
dry cloth. Continued use could result  
in fire.  
Do not handle the plug or go near  
the Battery Charger during lightning  
storms. Failure to observe this  
precaution could result in electric  
shock.  
Do not damage, modify or forcibly  
tug, place it under heavy objects, or  
expose it to heat or flames. Should  
the insulation be damaged and the  
wires become exposed, take it to a  
Nikon-authorized service  
representative for inspection. Failure  
to observe these precautions could  
result in fire or electric shock.  
Do not handle the plug or Battery  
Charger with wet hands. Failure to  
observe this precaution could result  
in electric shock.  
Do not use with travel converters or  
adapters designed to convert from  
one voltage to another or with DC-  
to-AC inverters. Failure to observe  
this precaution could damage the  
product or cause overheating or fire.  
Do not immerse in or expose to  
water.  
Replace the terminal cover when  
transporting the battery. Do not  
transport or store with metal objects  
such as necklaces or hairpins.  
The battery is prone to leakage when  
fully discharged. To avoid damage to  
the product, be sure to remove the  
battery when no charge remains.  
Discontinue use immediately should  
you notice any change in the battery,  
such as discoloration or deformation.  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For Your Safety  
Use appropriate cables  
When connecting cables to the input  
and output jacks, use only the cables  
provided or sold by Nikon for the  
purpose, to maintain compliance with  
product regulations.  
Do not operate the flash with  
the flash window touching a  
person or object  
Failure to observe this precaution could  
result in burns or fire.  
Avoid contact with liquid  
crystal  
Handle moving parts with care  
Be careful that your fingers or other  
objects are not pinched by the lens  
cover or other moving parts.  
Should the monitor break, care should  
be taken to avoid injury caused by  
broken glass and to prevent liquid  
crystal from the monitor touching the  
skin or entering the eyes or mouth.  
CD-ROMs  
The CD-ROMs supplied with this device  
should not be played back on audio CD  
equipment. Playing CD-ROMs on an  
audio CD player could cause hearing  
loss or damage the equipment.  
Turn the power off when using  
inside an airplane or the  
hospital  
Turn the power off while inside the  
airplane during take off or landing.  
Follow the instructions of the hospital  
when using while in a hospital. The  
electromagnetic waves given out by  
this camera may disrupt the electronic  
systems of the airplane or the  
Observe caution when using  
the flash  
Using the flash close to your subject’s  
eyes could cause temporary visual  
impairment. Particular care should be  
observed if photographing infants,  
when the flash should be no less than  
1 m (3 ft. 4 in.) from the subject.  
instruments of the hospital.  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notices  
interference to radio or television  
reception, which can be determined by  
turning the equipment off and on, the  
user is encouraged to try to correct the  
interference by one or more of the  
following measures:  
Notices for Customers in the  
U.S.A.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY  
INSTRUCTIONS-  
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.  
Reorient or relocate the receiving  
antenna.  
Increase the separation between the  
equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an  
outlet on a circuit different from that  
to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced  
radio/television technician for help.  
DANGER – TO REDUCE THE RISK OF  
FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,  
CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE  
INSTRUCTIONS  
For connection to a supply not in the  
U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter  
of the proper configuration for the  
power outlet if needed.  
The power supply unit is intended to be  
correctly orientated in a vertical or floor  
mount position.  
Federal Communications  
Commission (FCC) Radio  
Frequency Interference  
Statement  
COOLPIX P7000  
This equipment has been tested and  
found to comply with the limits for a  
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part  
15 of the FCC rules. These limits are  
designed to provide reasonable  
CAUTIONS  
Modifications  
The FCC requires the user to be notified  
that any changes or modifications  
made to this device that are not  
expressly approved by Nikon  
Corporation may void the user’s  
authority to operate the equipment.  
protection against harmful interference  
in a residential installation. This  
equipment generates, uses, and can  
radiate radio frequency energy and, if  
not installed and used in accordance  
with the instructions, may cause  
harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not  
occur in a particular installation. If this  
equipment does cause harmful  
Interface Cables  
Use the interface cables sold or  
provided by Nikon for your equipment.  
Using other interface cables may  
exceed the limits of Class B Part 15 of  
the FCC rules.  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notices  
Notice for Customers in the State of  
California  
WARNING  
This product is designated for  
separate collection at an appropriate  
collection point. Do not dispose of as  
household waste.  
For more information, contact the  
retailer or the local authorities in  
charge of waste management.  
Handling the cord on this product will  
expose you to lead, a chemical known  
to the State of California to cause birth  
defects or other reproductive harm.  
Wash hands after handling.  
This symbol on the battery  
indicates that the battery is  
to be collected separately.  
Nikon Inc.,  
1300 Walt Whitman Road,  
Melville, New York 11747-3064  
USA  
The following apply only to  
users in European countries:  
All batteries, whether marked with  
this symbol or not, are designated for  
separate collection at an appropriate  
collection point. Do not dispose of as  
household waste.  
For more information, contact the  
retailer or the local authorities in  
charge of waste management.  
Tel: 631-547-4200  
Notice for Customers in Canada  
CAUTION  
This Class B digital apparatus complies  
with Canadian ICES-003.  
ATTENTION  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B  
est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du  
Canada.  
Notices for Customers in Europe  
CAUTION  
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS  
REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.  
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES  
ACCORDING TO THE  
INSTRUCTIONS.  
This symbol indicates that this  
product is to be collected  
separately.  
The following apply only to  
users in European countries:  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
cMatching Image Colors with Colors as Seen with the Naked Eye  
(White Balance).....................................................................................................................................................76  
dContinuous Shooting while Changing the Shutter Speed, ISO Sensitivity and  
White Balance (Bracketing)............................................................................................................................80  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ix  
Table of Contents  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
About This Manual  
Thank you for your purchase of Nikon COOLPIX P7000 digital camera. This manual  
is written to help you enjoy taking pictures with your Nikon digital camera. Read  
this manual thoroughly before use, and keep it where all those who use the product  
will read it.  
Symbols and Conventions  
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following symbols and  
conventions are used:  
This icon marks cautions,  
information that should be read  
before use, to prevent damage to  
the camera.  
This icon marks tips, additional  
information that may be helpful  
when using the camera.  
B
C
D
This icon indicates that more  
information is available  
elsewhere in this manual or in the  
Quick Start Guide.  
This icon marks notes,  
information that should be read  
before using the camera.  
A
Notations  
Secure Digital (SD) memory card, SDHC memory card, and SDXC memory card  
are referred to as “memory card.”  
The setting at the time of purchase is referred to as the “default setting.  
The names of menu items displayed in the camera monitor, and the names of  
buttons or messages displayed in a computer monitor are indicated in bold text.  
Screen Samples  
In this manual, images are sometimes omitted from monitor display samples so  
that monitor indicators can be more clearly shown.  
Illustrations and Screen Display  
Illustrations and text displays shown in this manual may differ from actual display.  
C Memory Cards  
Pictures taken with this camera can be stored in the camera’s internal memory or on removable  
memory cards. If a memory card is inserted, the memory card is used. To use the internal memory for  
shooting, playback, deleting or formatting, remove the memory card.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Information and Precautions  
Life-Long Learning  
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product support and education,  
continually updated information is available online at the following sites:  
For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/  
For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/  
For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/  
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips, answers to frequently  
asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital imaging and photography. Additional  
information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the URL below for  
contact information:  
http://imaging.nikon.com/  
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories  
Nikon COOLPIX cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic  
circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including battery chargers, batteries and AC  
adapters) certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and  
proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry.  
THE USE OF NON-NIKON ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE THE CAMERA AND MAY VOID  
YOUR NIKON WARRANTY.  
The use of third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal could  
interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating, igniting,  
rupturing, or leaking.  
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized Nikon dealer.  
Holographic seal: Identifies this  
device as an authentic Nikon product.  
Before Taking Important Pictures  
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking the camera on  
a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable  
for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.  
About the Manuals  
No part of the manuals included with this product may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed,  
stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form, by any means, without  
Nikon’s prior written permission.  
Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in  
these manuals at any time and without prior notice.  
Nikon will not be held liable for any damages resulting from the use of this product.  
While every effort was made to ensure that the information in these manuals is accurate and  
complete, we would appreciate it were you to bring any errors or omissions to the attention of the  
Nikon representative in your area (address provided separately).  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Information and Precautions  
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction  
Note that simply being in possession of material that was digitally copied or reproduced by means of  
a scanner, digital camera or other device may be punishable by law.  
Items prohibited by law from being copied or reproduced  
Do not copy or reproduce paper money, coins, securities, government bonds or local government  
bonds, even if such copies or reproductions are stamped “Sample. The copying or reproduction of  
paper money, coins, or securities which are circulated in a foreign country is prohibited. Unless the  
prior permission of the government was obtained, the copying or reproduction of unused postage  
stamps or post cards issued by the government is prohibited.  
The copying or reproduction of stamps issued by the government and of certified documents  
stipulated by law is prohibited.  
Cautions on certain copies and reproductions  
The government has issued cautions on copies or reproductions of securities issued by private  
companies (shares, bills, checks, gift certificates, etc.), commuter passes or coupon tickets, except  
when a minimum of necessary copies are to be provided for business use by a company. Also, do not  
copy or reproduce passports issued by the government, licenses issued by public agencies and  
private groups, ID cards and tickets, such as passes and meal coupons.  
Comply with copyright notices  
The copying or reproduction of copyrighted creative works such as books, music, paintings, woodcut  
prints, maps, drawings, movies and photographs is governed by national and international copyright  
laws. Do not use this product for the purpose of making illegal copies or to infringe copyright laws.  
Disposing of Data Storage Devices  
Please note that deleting images or formatting data storage devices such as memory cards or built-in  
camera memory does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted files can sometimes be  
recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially available software, potentially  
resulting in the malicious use of personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s  
responsibility.  
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person, erase all data  
using commercial deletion software, or format the device and then completely refill it with images  
containing no private information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to also replace any  
pictures selected for the welcome screen (A169). Care should be taken to avoid injury or damage  
to property when physically destroying data storage devices.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts of the Camera  
Camera Body  
Built-in flash raised  
1
2
3 4  
5
6 7 8 9  
10  
11  
12  
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22  
23  
24 25 26  
Power connector cover (for connection  
with an optional AC Adapter)............199  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Eyelet for camera strap .............................15  
Exposure compensation dial.................43  
Exposure compensation dial mark....43  
Power switch/power-on lamp... 19, 181  
Mode dial...........................................................44  
Quick menu dial mark .................................67  
Quick menu button ....................................67  
Quick menu dial............................................67  
Microphone (stereo).........................132, 146  
16  
17 f(Av/Tv) button...................................9, 187  
18 Shutter-release button.....................10, 28  
Zoom control..................................................27  
f: Wide ...................................................27  
g : Tele......................................................27  
19  
h: Thumbnail playback..............116  
i : Playback zoom..........................118  
j: Help ....................................................45  
20 Infrared receiver (front).............................39  
21 w(FUNC) button............................11, 186  
10 Accessory Shoe Cover BS-1................. 202  
11 Accessory shoe........................................... 202  
12 Built-in flash .....................................................32  
13 HDMI Mini Connector ............................ 154  
Self-timer lamp...............................................35  
22  
AF-assist illuminator.................................177  
23 Lens......................................................... 197, 217  
24 Lens cover  
USB/Audio video connector  
14  
25 Lens ring..........................................................105  
26 Lens ring release button .......................105  
.........................................................154, 157, 162  
15 Connector cover...................154, 157, 162  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Parts of the Camera  
Bottom of camera  
1
2
3
4 5 6  
7
8
9
10 11  
19  
20 21  
12  
13  
14 15 1617 18  
22 23 24  
1
2
External microphone connector ..... 146  
Eyelet for camera strap .............................15  
13 Monitor..................................................6, 14, 25  
14 Infrared receiver (rear)................................39  
16 Rotary multi selector ..................................12  
17 l(delete) button....................31, 132, 153  
18 k(apply selection) button ...................12  
19 Tripod socket  
3 K(Flash pop-up) button.....................33  
4
5
6
7
Diopter adjustment control...................26  
Autofocus (AF) lamp...................................28  
Flash lamp.........................................................34  
Viewfinder.........................................................26  
8 c(playback) button.................................30  
Command dial ..................................................9  
Battery-chamber/  
memory card slot cover ...................18, 22  
20  
9
21 Cover latch................................................18, 22  
22 Memory card slot .........................................22  
23 Battery latch.............................................18, 19  
24 Battery chamber............................................18  
10 x(monitor) button.........................14, 15  
g(AE-L/AF-L) button.................... 11, 185  
11  
C (list by date) button.......................... 119  
12 Speaker..................................................132, 151  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Parts of the Camera  
Monitor  
Press the x (monitor) button to switch between displaying and hiding  
information (A14). The displayed information varies according to the camera  
settings and condition.  
Shooting  
6
4
5
45  
7
2
44  
43  
42  
14  
15  
10 11 12  
8 9  
1
3
13  
16  
17  
19  
39  
41  
40  
20  
22  
24  
18  
23  
37  
1/250  
F5.6  
999  
21  
38  
36  
35  
30 29  
25  
26  
28  
999  
9999  
1m00s  
1m00s  
34 33 32 31  
a
b
27  
46  
47  
1/250  
F5.6  
1342  
48  
49  
50  
1/250  
F5.6  
1342  
1/250  
F5.6  
1342  
1/250  
F5.6  
1342  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Parts of the Camera  
1
Shooting mode  
(a) Number of exposures remaining  
(still pictures).....................................24, 71  
(b) Movie length..............................146, 149  
1
.............................24, 44, 45, 58, 60, 112, 146  
Focus mode......................................................40  
Zoom indicator ..............................................27  
AE/AF-L indicator..........................................57  
Zoom memory....................................11, 107  
Zoom speed setting.................................179  
Flash mode.......................................................32  
Speedlight......................................................202  
Flash exposure compensation ..........102  
wbutton operation indicator  
.......................................................................11, 186  
Motion detection icon ...........................176  
Vibration reduction icon .......................175  
Battery level indicator................................24  
28  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Internal memory indicator..................... 25  
Aperture value............................................... 61  
Focus area (for manual, center)....28, 84  
Focus area (for auto)................................... 84  
Focus area (for face detection).....36, 84  
Focus area (for subject tracking) ........ 88  
Shutter speed................................................. 61  
ISO sensitivity ..........................................34, 74  
Exposure compensation value............ 43  
Bracketing......................................................... 80  
Exposure indicator ...................................... 65  
Noise reduction filter...............................103  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
10  
11  
12  
13  
Monitor brightness boost indicator  
..................................................................................15  
14  
AE-L/AF-L button setting......................185  
Distortion control ......................................104  
Wide-angle converter.............................104  
Built-in ND filter setting .........................184  
Long exposure noise reduction........103  
White balance mode................................. 76  
Self-timer indicator ..................................... 35  
Remote Control............................................. 38  
Smile timer....................................................... 36  
Continuous shooting mode.................. 99  
Quick menu dial indicator...................... 67  
Spot metering area..................................... 98  
Center-weighted area............................... 98  
15  
16  
17  
18  
43  
COOLPIX Picture Control..........................92  
Active D-Lighting.......................................106  
“Date not set” indicator..........................205  
Travel destination indicator.................170  
Date imprint..................................................174  
Movie options..............................................148  
Wind noise reduction..............................150  
Image quality ..................................................68  
Image size..........................................................70  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
2
Virtual horizon ...........................................173  
2
View/hide histograms ...........................173  
2
View/hide framing grid ........................173  
1
2
The icons vary with the shooting mode.  
The view or hide setting for the virtual horizon, histogram and framing grid displays can be  
changed in Photo info (A173) of Monitor settings in the setup menu.  
In shooting modes E, Fand N, set in Photo info of the specialized menus for E, Fand  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts of the Camera  
Playback  
1
2
3
4
5
22  
21  
20  
19  
15/11/2010 12:00  
9999.JPG  
24  
23  
6
7
8
17  
16  
15  
18  
14  
999/999  
9
10  
999/999  
9999/9999  
1m00s  
1m00s  
11  
12  
13  
a
b
Date of recording......................................... 20  
Time of recording ........................................ 20  
Protect icon....................................................129  
Volume indicator.............................132, 151  
Battery level indicator ............................... 24  
Voice memo playback guide............. 132  
Movie playback guide............................ 151  
List by date guide...................................... 119  
Miniature effect indicator..................... 142  
Skin softening icon................................... 139  
Print-order icon .......................................... 123  
Small picture ......................................137, 145  
Straighten indicator................................. 141  
Black border indicator............................ 138  
D-Lighting icon .......................................... 136  
Quick retouch icon................................... 135  
Voice memo indicator............................ 132  
File number and type............................. 203  
1
2
3
4
5
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
Monitor brightness boost indicator  
................................................................................. 15  
6
7
8
*
Image quality ................................................ 68  
*
Image size .............................................70, 153  
*
Movie options ............................................148  
(a) Current frame number/ total  
number of frames................................. 30  
(b) Movie length.........................................151  
9
Internal memory indicator..................... 30  
Voice memo recording guide............132  
10  
11  
*
The icons vary with the settings used for shooting.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic Operations  
Command Dial  
You can rotate the command dial to select  
items from a menu screen or to set any of the  
following functions.  
For Shooting  
Mode  
Description  
A
Programmed auto  
(mode dial set to A)  
Shutter-priority auto  
(mode dial set to B)  
Adjust the flexible program  
Adjust shutter speed  
Aperture-priority auto  
(mode dial set to C)  
Adjust aperture value (when the Av/Tv button  
is pressed*)  
Adjust shutter speed or aperture value (Press  
the Av/Tv button to switch between setting 65  
the shutter speed and aperture value.*)  
Manual  
(mode dial set to D)  
*
When the Av/Tv button (A187) setting is Toggle Av/Tv selection (default setting).  
For Playback  
Mode  
Description  
A
Full-frame playback or thumbnail  
playback  
Choose a picture  
Calendar display  
Choose a date  
Playback zoom  
Change the zoom ratio  
During movie pause or editing  
Advanced or rewound by one frame  
f(Av/Tv) Button  
Press the Av/Tv button in shooting mode B, Cor Dto  
select whether to use the command dial or the rotary  
multi selector to set the shutter speed or aperture value.  
The Av/Tv button function can be changed with Av/  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Basic Operations  
Quick Menu Dial and Quick Menu Button  
Rotate the quick menu dial to align the mark with the  
function that you want to set. Items such as a(image  
quality and image size) can be set.  
When the quick menu button is pressed while  
shooting, the setting menu (quick menu) is displayed  
for the function that is selected with the mark.  
When eis chosen, the “Tone level information”  
(A82) function is turned on with the quick menu  
button.  
Press the quick menu button again to exit the quick  
menu.  
Available functions differ according to the shooting  
mode.  
See “Quick Menu” (A67) for more information.  
Pressing the Shutter-Release Button Halfway/All the Way  
Down  
The camera features a two-stage shutter-release button. To set the focus and exposure,  
press the shutter-release button halfway, stopping when you feel resistance. The focus  
and exposure lock while the shutter-release button is held in this position. To release the  
shutter and take a picture, press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.  
Do not use force when pressing the shutter-release button, as this may result in camera  
shake and blurred pictures. Press the button slowly.  
Press the shutter-release  
button halfway to lock  
the focus and exposure.  
Press the shutter-release  
button the rest of the  
way down to shoot.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Basic Operations  
g(AE-L/AF-L) Button  
When shooting still pictures, instead of pressing  
the shutter-release button halfway, you can use  
the AE-L/AF-L button to shoot with focus lock  
(A29).  
The exposure and focus are locked while the  
AE-L/AF-L button is pressed. Fully press the  
shutter-release button to release the shutter  
with the locked exposure and focus (default setting).  
The operations performed when the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed can be set with  
AE/AF lock button in the setup menu (A185).  
When the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed during playback, the list by date screen can  
be displayed to play back only pictures shot on the same date (A119).  
w(FUNC) Button  
Use the wbutton with the zoom control or  
shutter-release button.  
This can be used when A, B, C, D, E, For  
Nis selected for shooting mode.  
Combined with the zoom control  
When shooting, operate the zoom control while  
pressing the wbutton. This quickly changes to the  
zoom lens focal length that is set with Zoom  
memory (A107) in the shooting menu.  
Combined with the shutter-release button  
When shooting, press the shutter-release button while  
holding down the wbutton. You can shoot with the  
function setting that is assigned to Fn button (A186)  
in the setup menu, without changing the shooting  
menu setting.  
In the default setting, no function is assigned.  
When the wbutton is pressed while a function is assigned, the wbutton  
operation indicator (A6) and the icon for the assigned function are displayed.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Basic Operations  
Rotary Multi Selector  
Operate by rotating the rotary multi selector, pressing up (H), down (I), left (J)  
or right (K) on the rotary multi selector, or pressing the kbutton.  
For Shooting  
Display m(flash mode)  
(A32) menu/Choose  
the option above  
Rotate to set the exposure/  
1
Choose the option  
Display G (AF area  
mode) menu  
(A84)/Choose the  
option on the right  
Display n(Self-timer/  
Smile timer/  
Remote control) menu  
(A35, 36, 38)/Choose  
the option on the left  
2
Auto  
Apply selection  
Display D (focus mode) menu (A40)/Choose the option below  
The aperture value or shutter speed can be set in shooting mode B, C, D, E, For N(A63,  
64, 65). Items can be chosen while a menu is displayed.  
1
2
Displayed for A, B, C, D, E, Fand Nmodes, and O(low noise night) mode.  
For Playback  
15/11/2010 15:30  
0004.JPG  
Choose the previous  
picture*  
Choose the next  
picture*  
4
132  
*
Previous or subsequent pictures can also be chosen by rotating the rotary multi selector.  
For Menu Screen  
Choose the option above*  
Shooting menu  
Choose the option  
on the right*/  
Display sub-menu  
Choose the option on  
the left*/Return display  
to the previous screen  
Picture Control  
Custom Picture Control  
Metering  
Continuous  
Autofocus mode  
Flash exp. comp.  
Noise reduction filter  
or apply selection  
Choose the option  
below*  
Apply selection or  
display sub-menu  
*
Items can also be chosen by rotating the rotary multi selector.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Basic Operations  
dButton  
Press the dbutton to display the menu and  
to select options for the menu items.  
Use the rotary multi selector to navigate the  
menus (A12).  
Menu items can also be chosen by rotating  
the command dial.  
Select a tab on the left end of the monitor to display the corresponding menu  
Press the dbutton again to exit the menu.  
Displayed when the menu contains  
two or more pages  
This tab displays the available menus in the  
mode selected with the mode dial.*  
Shooting menu  
Picture Control  
Custom Picture Control  
Metering  
This tab displays the playback menu.  
This tab displays the setup menu.  
Continuous  
Autofocus mode  
Flash exp. comp.  
Noise reduction filter  
Displayed when there are following menu  
options  
Shooting menu  
Distortion control  
Displayed when  
there are previous  
menu options  
Long exposure NR  
Distortion control  
Wide-angle converter  
Flash control  
On  
Off  
Active D-Lighting  
Zoom memory  
Choose an item, and then  
press the kbutton or the  
rotary multi selector Kto  
proceed to the sub-menu.  
Press the kbutton or the  
rotary multi selector Kto  
apply the selection.  
*
The displayed tabs differ according to the chosen shooting mode.  
A(auto) mode: Tabs are not displayed.  
C(scene): Scene menu tab (A45)  
O(low noise night): Low noise night menu tab (A58)  
A, B, C, D: Shooting menu tab (A90)  
E, F, N: E, F, Nspecialized menu tab (A112), shooting menu tab on the second  
level  
D(movie): Movie menu tab (A149)  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic Operations  
Switching Between Tabs in the Menu Screen  
In the menu screen that is displayed when the dbutton is pressed (A13),  
choose the left end tab to switch to the menu of the chosen tab.  
Shooting menu  
Shooting menu  
Set up  
Welcome screen  
Date  
Monitor settings  
Date imprint  
Vibration reduction  
Motion detection  
AF assist  
Picture Control  
Custom Picture Control  
Metering  
Picture Control  
Custom Picture Control  
Metering  
Continuous  
Continuous  
Autofocus mode  
Flash exp. comp.  
Noise reduction filter  
Autofocus mode  
Flash exp. comp.  
Noise reduction filter  
Press the rotary multi  
selector Jto highlight the  
tab.  
Press the rotary multi  
The corresponding menu  
is displayed.  
selector Hor Ito choose  
another tab, and press  
either the kbutton or K.  
x(Monitor) Button  
To switch between the information displayed  
on the monitor during shooting and playback,  
press the x(monitor) button.  
For Shooting  
1/250  
F5.6  
1342  
1, 2  
Display information  
Display the picture and the  
shooting data.  
Information hidden  
Display the picture only.  
Monitor off  
Turn off the monitor.  
For Playback  
15/11/2010 15:30  
0004.JPG  
1/250 F5.6  
4
132  
4
132  
3
Display photo information  
Display the picture and the  
photo information.  
Information hidden  
Display the picture only.  
Tone level information  
(excluding movies)  
Display a histogram, and tone  
level and shooting information .  
4
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Basic Operations  
1
2
3
Available when the mode dial is set to A, B, C, D, E, For N.  
The shutter does not click when the focus is not locked and the AF lamp does not light up.  
For details about the tone level information, see “Checking the Picture Brightness Distribution (A,  
4
The shooting information displayed includes the shooting mode A, B, Cor D, shutter speed,  
aperture value, image quality, image size, ISO sensitivity, white balance, exposure compensation,  
COOLPIX picture control, and the current file number/total number of exposures.  
Ais displayed when the shooting mode A, y, Oor Ais chosen.  
C Holding Down the xButton and b (Monitor Brightness Boost Indicator)  
Hold down the xbutton to set the monitor to the maximum brightness. To return the brightness  
to its original level, hold down the xbutton again or turn off the camera. When the brightness is set  
to the maximum with the xbutton, b (monitor brightness boost indicator) is displayed on the  
monitor.  
C Virtual Horizon, Histogram and Grid Displays for Shooting  
The display options for the monitor can be changed in Photo info (A173) of Monitor settings in  
the setup menu. A virtual horizon, histogram and grid are available as the display options.  
Attaching the Camera Strap  
Attach the strap  
at two places.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
First Steps  
Charging the Battery  
Charge the Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14 (supplied) using the Battery  
Charger MH-24 (supplied).  
1
Prepare the Battery Charger MH-24.  
If a plug adapter* is included, attach the plug adapter to the  
plug on the Battery Charger. Push the plug adapter firmly until  
it is securely held in place. Attempting to forcibly remove the  
plug adapter could damage the product.  
* The shape of the plug adapter varies according to the  
country or region in which the camera was purchased.  
For Customers in Argentina  
If the camera was purchased in Argentina, the plug adapter is  
already fixed onto the Battery Charger MH-24. Proceed to  
step 2.  
2
3
While pushing in the battery (1), set it into the Battery Charger (2).  
1
2
Plug the Battery Charger into an electrical outlet.  
CHARGE lamp starts blinking when charging starts.  
Charging is complete when the CHARGE lamp stops  
blinking.  
A fully-exhausted battery charges in about one hour and  
30 minutes.  
CHARGE  
lamp  
The following chart explains CHARGE lamp status.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Charging the Battery  
CHARGE lamp  
Blinks  
Description  
Battery charging.  
On  
Battery fully charged.  
The battery is set incorrectly. Disconnect the Battery  
Charger from the electrical outlet, remove the battery, and  
then reset the battery to lie flat in the Battery Charger.  
Operating temperature range exceeded. Charge the  
battery indoors while the ambient temperature is 5°C to  
35°C (41°F to 95°F).  
The battery is faulty. Immediately disconnect the Battery  
Charger from the electrical outlet, and stop charging. Take  
the battery and Battery Charger to your retailer or Nikon-  
authorized service representative.  
Flickers  
4
When charging is complete, remove the battery, and then disconnect  
the Battery Charger from the electrical outlet.  
B Notes on Battery Charger  
The supplied Battery Charger is for use only with a Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14.  
Be sure to read and follow the warnings and cautions of “For Your Safety” (Aii) thoroughly before  
using the Battery Charger.  
The MH-24 is compatible with AC 100-240 V, 50/60 Hz electrical outlets. When using in other  
countries, use a commercially available plug adapter as necessary. For more information about  
plug adapters, consult your travel agency.  
B Notes on Battery  
Be sure to read and follow the warnings and cautions of “For Your Safety” (Aii) thoroughly before  
using the battery.  
Be sure to read and follow the warnings for “The Battery” (A196) thoroughly before using the  
battery.  
If the battery will not be used for an extended period, recharge it at least once every six months  
and run it flat before returning it to storage.  
C Notes on AC Power Supply  
If the AC Adapter EH-5a and the Power Connector EP-5A (available separately) (A199) are used,  
power is supplied to the camera from an electrical outlet, enabling taking and playing back  
pictures.  
Do not, under any circumstances, use an AC Adapter other than the EH-5a or a Power Connector  
other than the EP-5A. Failure to observe this precaution could result in overheating or in damage  
to the camera.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting the Battery  
Insert a Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14 (supplied) into the camera.  
Charge the battery before first use or when the battery is running low (A16).  
1
Open the battery-chamber/memory card  
slot cover.  
Slide the cover latch to the Yside (1), and open  
the cover (2).  
2
Insert the battery (supplied).  
Confirm that the positive (+) and  
negative (–) terminals are  
oriented correctly, as shown on  
the label at the entrance of the  
battery chamber, and insert the  
battery.  
Use the battery to push the  
orange battery latch in the  
direction shown (1), and fully  
insert the battery (2).  
Battery chamber  
When the battery is fully inserted, the battery latch locks it in place.  
B Inserting the Battery Correctly  
Inserting the battery upside down or backwards could damage the camera. Be  
sure to confirm that the battery is in the correct orientation.  
3
Close the battery-chamber/memory card slot  
cover.  
Close the cover (1), and slide the cover latch to the Z  
position (2).  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Inserting the Battery  
Removing the Battery  
Before opening the battery-chamber/memory card slot  
cover, turn the camera off (A19) and confirm that the  
power-on lamp and the monitor are off.  
To eject the battery, open the battery-chamber/memory  
card slot cover and slide the battery latch in the direction  
shown (1). Then, remove the battery straight (2).  
Note that the battery or memory card may become hot during use; observe due  
caution when removing the battery.  
Turning On and Off the Camera  
Press the power switch.  
The power-on lamp (green) and the  
monitor are turned on (when the  
monitor is turned on, the power-on lamp  
turns off).  
Press the power switch again to turn off  
the camera. When the power is turned  
off, the power-on lamp and monitor also turn off.  
When the camera is off, holding down the cbutton turns on the camera in  
playback mode (A30).  
C Standby Mode (Auto Off)  
If no operations are performed, the monitor is turned off automatically, the camera enters standby  
mode and the power-on lamp blinks. The camera turns off when the standby mode continues for  
about three minutes.  
When the power-on lamp blinks, turn on the monitor again with one of the following operations.  
-
-
Press the power switch, the shutter-release button or the cbutton.  
Rotate the mode dial.  
During shooting or playback, if no operations are performed for about a minute (default setting),  
the camera enters standby mode.  
The time that elapses before the camera enters standby mode can be changed from the Auto off  
(A181) in the setup menu (A167).  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Setting the Display Language, Date and Time  
Dialogs for language selection and camera clock setting are displayed the first time  
the camera is turned on.  
1
2
3
4
Press the power switch to turn on the camera.  
Use the rotary multi selector to  
choose the desired language and  
press the kbutton.  
For information on using the rotary multi  
selector, see “Rotary Multi Selector” (A12).  
Choose Yes and press the kbutton.  
Date  
Set time and date?  
If No is selected, the date and time are not set.  
Yes  
No  
Press Jor Kto select your home time zone  
(Time zone) (A172), and press the kbutton.  
London  
Casablanca  
Back  
D Daylight Saving Time  
To set the date and time in a time zone where daylight saving is in  
effect, turn on the daylight saving setting with Hin the time zone  
selection screen shown in step 4.  
London  
Casablanca  
When turned on, the W icon is displayed on the top of the screen.  
To turn off, press I.  
Back  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Setting the Display Language, Date and Time  
5
Set the date and time.  
Date  
To choose an item: Press Kor J(selected in the  
following order: D (day) M (month) Y (year) ➝  
hour minute DMY (date display order)).  
D
M
Y
01  
01  
2010  
00  
00  
To set the contents: Rotate the rotary multi selector, or  
press Hor I.  
Edit  
YMD, MDY or DMY can be chosen for the order in which  
the day, month, and year are displayed.  
6
Finally, choose DMY, and apply the selection  
by pressing the kbutton or K.  
Date  
D
M
Y
The clock starts. The lens extends and the monitor  
display reverts to shooting mode.  
15  
11  
2010  
15  
10  
Edit  
D Imprinting the Date and Changing the Date and Time  
To imprint the date on pictures when shooting, first set the date and time, and then set Date  
imprint (A174) in the setup menu (A167).  
To change the date and time of the camera clock, select Date in Date (A170) of the setup menu.  
Follow the procedure described in step 5 above.  
Select Time zone from Date in the setup menu to change the time zone and daylight saving time  
settings (A170).  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Inserting the Memory Card  
The recorded data is stored in the camera’s internal memory (approx. 79 MB) or on  
commercially available Secure Digital (SD) memory cards (A221).  
If a memory card is inserted in the camera, data is automatically stored on the  
memory card, and data recorded to the memory card can be played back,  
deleted, or transferred. To use the internal memory, remove the memory  
card.  
1
Confirm that the power-on lamp and the  
monitor are turned off and open the battery-  
chamber/memory card slot cover.  
Be sure to turn off the camera before opening the  
battery-chamber/memory card slot cover.  
2
Insert the memory card.  
Slide the memory card in correctly as  
shown on the right, until it clicks into  
place.  
Close the battery-chamber/memory  
card slot cover after inserting the  
memory card.  
B Inserting the Memory Card Correctly  
Inserting the memory card upside down or backwards could damage the camera or  
the memory card. Be sure to confirm that the memory card is in the correct orientation.  
Removing the Memory Card  
Before opening the battery-chamber/memory card slot  
cover, turn the camera off and confirm that the power-  
on lamp and the monitor are off.  
Press the memory card in lightly with your finger (1) to  
partially eject it, and then pull it out straight (2).  
Note that the battery or memory card may become  
hot during use; observe due caution when removing  
the battery.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Inserting the Memory Card  
B Formatting a Memory Card  
Card is not formatted.  
Format card?  
If the message on the right is displayed, the memory card must be  
formatted before use. Note that formatting (A182)  
permanently deletes all pictures and other data on the  
memory card. Be sure to make copies of any data you wish to keep  
before formatting the memory card.  
Yes  
No  
To format, use the rotary multi selector to choose Yes and press the  
kbutton. When the confirmation dialog is displayed, choose  
Format and press the kbutton to start formatting.  
Do not turn the camera off, or open the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover until formatting  
is complete.  
The first time you insert a memory card that has been used in another device into this camera, be  
sure to format it (A182) with this camera.  
B The Write Protect Switch  
Memory cards are equipped with a write protect switch. When  
this switch is in the “Lock” position, data cannot be written to,  
or deleted from, the memory card. If you want to record data,  
delete data or format the memory card, and the switch is in the  
“Lock” position, slide the switch to its original position to  
unlock it.  
Write protect switch  
B Memory Cards  
Use only Secure Digital memory cards.  
Do not perform the following operations during formatting, while data is being written to or  
deleted from the memory card, or during data transfer to a computer. Failure to observe this  
precaution could result in the loss of data or in damage to the memory card:  
-
-
-
-
Eject the memory card  
Remove the battery  
Turn off the camera  
Disconnect the AC adapter  
Do not use a computer to format the memory card.  
Do not disassemble or modify.  
Do not drop, bend, or expose to water or strong physical shocks.  
Do not touch the metal terminals with your fingers or metal objects.  
Do not affix labels or stickers to the memory card.  
Do not leave in direct sunlight, closed vehicles or areas exposed to high temperatures.  
Do not expose to humidity, dust, or corrosive gases.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic Photography and Playback: A(Auto) Mode  
Step 1 Turn the Camera On and Select  
A
(Auto) Mode  
This section describes how to take pictures in A(auto) mode, an automatic, “point-  
and-shoot” mode recommended for first-time users of digital cameras.  
1
2
Press the power switch to turn on the camera.  
The lens extends, and the monitor is turned on.  
Rotate the mode dial  
to A.  
1/250  
F5.6  
32  
3
Check the battery level and number of  
exposures remaining on the monitor.  
Battery level indicator  
Battery Level  
Monitor  
(NO  
Description  
Battery fully charged.  
INDICATOR)  
1/250  
F5.6  
32  
Battery level low; prepare to charge or  
replace the battery.  
B (lights)  
Number of exposures  
remaining  
N
Cannot shoot. Recharge or replace with  
a fully-charged battery.  
Battery  
exhausted.  
Number of Exposures Remaining  
The number of exposures remaining is displayed.  
The number of pictures that can be stored depends on the remaining capacity of the  
internal memory or memory card, the image quality, and the image size (A71).  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Step 1 Turn the Camera On and Select A(Auto) Mode  
Indicators Displayed in A(Auto) Mode  
Shooting mode  
is displayed in  
(auto) mode.  
Vibration reduction icon  
Reduces the effects of  
camera shake.  
A
A
Shutter speed  
32  
1/250  
F5.6  
Aperture value (A61)  
Image quality/image size  
The current image quality  
(compression) and image size  
are displayed. The default  
settings are W (Normal) for  
image quality and J (3648 ×  
2736) for image size.  
Internal memory indicator  
Pictures are recorded to internal memory  
(approx. 79 MB). When a memory card is  
inserted, C is not displayed and pictures are  
recorded to the memory card.  
To turn on the monitor in the power save standby mode, press the power switch or  
shutter-release button (A181).  
C Note on the Flash  
When the built-in flash is lowered, the flash setting is fixed to off and Wappears at the top of the  
monitor. In situations where a flash is needed, such as in dark locations or when the subject is backlit,  
be sure to raise the built-in flash (A33).  
C Functions Available in A(Auto) Mode  
Focus mode (A40) and exposure compensation (A43) can be applied and pictures can be taken  
using the flash mode (A32) and self-timer (A35).  
The image quality/image size can be changed by rotating the quick menu dial to aand pressing  
the quick menu button (A68).  
D Vibration Reduction  
See Vibration reduction (A175) in the setup menu (A167) for more information.  
Set Vibration reduction to Off when using a tripod to stabilize the camera during shooting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
25  
     
Step 2 Frame a Picture  
1
Ready the camera.  
Hold the camera steadily in both hands.  
Keep your fingers, hair, strap and other objects away from the lens, flash, AF-assist  
illuminator, microphone and speaker.  
When using the flash (A32) to shoot in the “tall” orientation, hold the camera so that  
the flash is above the lens.  
2
Frame the picture.  
Position the main subject near the center of the  
monitor.  
1/250  
F5.6  
32  
Using the Viewfinder  
Use the viewfinder to frame pictures when bright light  
makes it difficult to see the monitor.  
When the image in the viewfinder is difficult to see,  
adjust by rotating the diopter adjustment control while  
looking through the viewfinder.  
Take care not to scratch your eye with your fingertips  
or nails.  
Diopter  
Viewfinder  
adjustment  
control  
B Notes on the Viewfinder  
As the area visible in the viewfinder may differ from that of the final  
picture, use the monitor to frame pictures in the following situations:  
When shooting at ranges of about 2 m (6 ft. 7 in.) or less at the maximum telephoto position  
When a wide-angle converter lens is used (available separately from Nikon; A104)  
When the digital zoom is applied (A27)  
When shooting at an Image size  
I
3648×2432  
,
z
3584×2016 or  
H
2732736  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Step 2 Frame a Picture  
Using the Zoom  
Zoom in  
Zoom out  
Rotate the zoom control to activate the optical zoom.  
Rotate in the gdirection to zoom in so that the  
subject fills a larger area of the frame. Rotate in the f  
direction to zoom out so that the area visible increases  
in the frame.  
A zoom indicator is displayed at the top of the  
monitor when the zoom control is rotated.  
Optical zoom Digital zoom  
Digital Zoom  
When the camera is already at the maximum optical zoom magnification, rotating  
the zoom control in the g(telephoto) direction triggers the digital zoom. The  
subject can be magnified up to 4× the maximum optical zoom ratio.  
The focus will be on the center of the frame and the focus area will not be displayed  
when the digital zoom is in effect.  
Maximum optical  
Digital zoom is in effect.  
zoom magnification  
C Digital Zoom and Interpolation  
Unlike the optical zoom, the digital zoom uses a digital imaging process known as interpolation to  
magnify images, resulting in slight deterioration of picture quality depending on the image size  
(A70) and digital zoom magnification.  
Interpolation is applied at zoom positions beyond V. When the zoom is increased beyond the V  
position, interpolation is initiated and the zoom indicator also turns yellow to indicate that  
interpolation is being applied.  
The position of V moves to the right as image size decreases, allowing for confirmation of the zoom  
positions at which shooting still pictures without interpolation is possible at the current image size  
setting.  
When the image size is small  
Using Digital zoom (A178) in the setup menu (A167), it is possible to restrict the magnification  
of the digital zoom to a range where images do not deteriorate, or to set the digital zoom so that  
it does not operate.  
D More Information  
See “Zoom Memory” (A107) for more Information.  
See “Zoom Speed” (A179) for more Information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
27  
           
Step 3 Focus and Shoot  
1
Press the shutter-release button halfway.  
When the button is pressed halfway (A10), the  
camera focuses.  
The camera automatically focuses on the subject in the  
center focus area. When the subject is in focus, the  
focus area lights in green, and the AF lamp next to the  
viewfinder lights.  
1/250  
F5.6  
When the digital zoom is in effect, the camera focuses  
on the subject in the center of the screen, and the focus  
area is not displayed. When the subject is in focus, the  
AF lamp lights in green.  
The focus and exposure remain locked while the  
shutter-release button is pressed halfway.  
When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway and  
the focus indicator blinks red or the AF lamp blinks  
rapidly, the camera is unable to focus. Change the  
composition and press the shutter-release button  
halfway again.  
2
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the  
way down.  
The shutter is released and the picture is recorded to  
the memory card or internal memory.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Step 3 Focus and Shoot  
B During Recording  
While the AF lamp or the indicator showing the number of exposures remaining is blinking, images  
are being recorded. Do not open the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover. Cutting the  
power or removing the memory card in these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage  
to the camera or card.  
B Autofocus  
Autofocus may not perform as expected in the following situations. In some rare cases, the subject  
may not be in focus despite the fact that the active focus area or focus indicator lights green:  
Subject is very dark  
Objects of sharply differing brightness are included in the scene (e.g. the sun behind the subject  
makes that subject appear very dark)  
No contrast between the subject and surroundings (e.g. a portrait subject, wearing a white shirt, is  
standing in front of a white wall)  
Several objects are at different distances from the camera (e.g., an animal inside a cage)  
Subjects that repeat the same pattern (e.g., as window blinds or buildings lined with windows of  
the same shape)  
Subject is moving rapidly  
In the situations noted above, try pressing the shutter-release button halfway to refocus several times,  
or focus on another subject and use focus lock. When using focus lock, be sure that the distance  
between the camera and the subject with which focus was locked is the same as that for the actual  
subject.  
The camera can also be focused using manual focus (A42).  
D Focus Lock  
Use focus lock to focus on off-center subjects when Center is selected for AF area mode.  
Be sure that the distance between the camera and the subject does not change.  
When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the exposure is locked.  
1/250  
F5.6  
32  
1/250  
F5.6  
1/250  
F5.6  
Frame the  
Press the  
shutter-  
release  
Confirm that  
thefocusareais down the shutter- shutter-release  
green. release button button the rest  
halfway and of the way  
Continue holding  
Press the  
subject to be  
focused on  
using the  
button  
camera.  
halfway.  
recompose the down to shoot.  
picture.  
Instead of pressing the shutter-release button halfway, you can also press the AE-L/AF-L button to  
shoot with focus lock (A11).  
D AF-assist illuminator  
In dark places, the AF-assist illuminator (A177) may light when the shutter-release button is pressed  
halfway.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Step 4 Viewing and Deleting Pictures  
Viewing Pictures (Playback Mode)  
Press the c(Playback) button.  
c(Playback)  
button  
The last picture shot is displayed in full-  
frame playback mode.  
Rotate the rotary multi selector, or press H,  
I, Jor Kto view previous or subsequent  
pictures. Continue holding down H, I, J  
or Kto fast forward pictures.  
Pictures can also be chosen by rotating the  
command dial.  
Rotary multi selector  
Pictures may be briefly displayed at low resolution immediately after switching to the  
previous or next picture.  
Press the cbutton or the shutter-release button to switch to shooting mode.  
C is displayed when pictures stored in the internal memory  
are displayed. When a memory card is inserted, C is not  
displayed and pictures stored on the memory card are  
displayed.  
15/11/2010 15:30  
0004.JPG  
4
4
Internal memory indicator  
C When the Monitor Is Turned Off to Save Power  
When the power-on lamp blinks, press the cbutton to turn on the monitor again (A181).  
C Options Available in Playback Mode  
C Pressing the cButton to Turn on the Camera  
When the camera is off, holding down the cbutton turns on the camera in playback mode. The lens  
does not extend.  
C Viewing Pictures  
Press the xbutton to hide or show the shooting information and photo information on the  
monitor (A14).  
Pictures taken in portrait (“tall”) orientation will be rotated automatically (A180). The rotating  
direction can be changed from the Rotate image option (A130) in the playback menu (A122).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30  
         
Step 4 Viewing and Deleting Pictures  
Deleting Unnecessary Pictures  
1
Press the lbutton to delete the  
picture currently displayed on  
the monitor.  
2
Use the rotary multi selector to choose Yes  
and press the kbutton.  
Erase 1 image?  
The picture that is deleted cannot be restored.  
To exit without deleting the picture, choose No and  
press the kbutton.  
Yes  
No  
B Notes on Deletion  
When images shot with an Image quality (A68) setting of NRW (RAW) + Fine, NRW (RAW) +  
Normal or NRW (RAW) + Basic are deleted with the l button, both the NRW (RAW) and JPEG  
images that were recorded at the same time are deleted.  
To delete only NRW (RAW) images or JPEG images, select Erase selected NRW images or Erase  
selected JPEG images in Delete (A127) of the playback menu (A122).  
C Deleting the Last Picture Taken While in Shooting Mode  
In shooting mode, press the lbutton to delete the last picture shot.  
Erase 1 image?  
Yes  
No  
D Deleting Multiple Pictures  
To delete multiple pictures, choose Delete (A127) from the playback menu (A122) or list by date  
menu (A121).  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using the Flash  
In dark locations or when the subject is backlit, you can shoot pictures with a flash by  
raising the built-in flash. You can set a flash mode that suits the shooting conditions.  
The flash has a range of about 0.5 to 6.5 m (1 ft. 8 in. to 21 ft.) for wide, and about  
0.8 to 3 m (2 ft. 8 in. to 9 ft. 10 in.) for tele (when ISO sensitivity is set to Auto).  
Auto  
U
V
W
Flash fires automatically when lighting is poor.  
Auto with red-eye reduction  
Reduces “red-eye” in portraits.  
Off  
Flash does not fire.  
Available when the scene mode is x(scene auto selector) or a Speedlight  
(external flash unit) is attached.  
Fill flash  
X
The flash fires when a picture is taken, regardless of how bright the subject is. Use to  
“fill-in” (illuminate) shadows and backlit subjects.  
Manual  
S
Flash is forcibly fired at the flash output that is set for the built-in flash.  
Choose the flash output from S Full (full flash), S1/2, S1/4, S1/8, S1/16,  
S1/32 and S1/64. For example, when S1/16 is chosen, the flash is 1/16 of the  
full flash.  
Not available when a Speedlight flash unit (available separately) is attached.  
Slow sync  
Y
Z
Fill flash is combined with a slow shutter speed.  
Suitable for portraits of human subjects shot at night or under dim light. Flash  
illuminates main subject; slow shutter speeds are used to capture background.  
Rear-curtain sync  
Fill flash fires just before the shutter closes, creating the effect of a stream of light  
behind moving subjects.  
C Flash Mode Setting  
The default flash mode setting varies with the shooting mode (A44).  
- A(auto) mode: UAuto  
-
SCENE: Options vary depending on the scenes (A46 to 55).  
- A, B, C, D, E, F, N: UAuto  
This feature cannot be used simultaneously with certain features. See “Functions that Cannot be  
Applied Simultaneously” (A108) for more information.  
In the following situations, the setting for flash mode is stored in the camera’s memory even after  
the camera is turned off.  
-
-
When shooting mode A, B, Cor Dis used  
When shooting with V(Auto with red-eye reduction) in A(auto) mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
32  
                 
Using the Flash  
Setting the Flash Mode  
1
Press the K(flash pop-up) button.  
Built-in flash is raised.  
When the built-in flash is lowered, the flash mode is fixed to W(Off ).  
2
3
Press m(flash mode) on the rotary multi  
selector.  
The flash mode menu is displayed.  
Use the rotary multi selector to choose the  
desired mode and press the kbutton.  
When the manual flash is chosen, choose the flash  
output with Jor Kbefore pressing the kbutton.  
Auto  
The mode selected for the flash is displayed.  
When U(Auto) is applied, D is only displayed for  
a few seconds even if monitor indicators (A14) are  
turned on.  
If the kbutton is not pressed within a few seconds, the  
selection is set and the setting menu disappears.  
1/250  
F5.6  
32  
B Lowering the Built-in Flash  
When not using the built-in flash, gently push to lower the flash until  
it clicks shut.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Using the Flash  
B Shooting When Lighting is Poor or When the Flash is Set to W(Off)  
Use of a tripod is recommended to stabilize the camera during shooting and avoid the effects of  
camera shake. When the camera is stabilized with a tripod, set Vibration reduction (A175) to  
Off in the setup menu (A167).  
E may be displayed in the shooting mode. When E is displayed, the ISO sensitivity has  
increased automatically.  
When shooting at slow shutter speeds in dark location, the noise reduction function may operate.  
When the noise reduction function operates, it may take more time to save images.  
B Note on Using the Flash  
Reflections from dust particles in the air may appear as bright spots in pictures. To reduce these  
reflections, set the flash to W(Off), or shoot pictures with the built-in flash lowered.  
C Flash Lamp  
The flash lamp shows the flash status when the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway down.  
On: Flash fires when picture is shot.  
Blinks: Flash is charging. Wait a few seconds and try again.  
Off: Flash does not fire when picture is shot.  
When the battery level is low, the monitor is turned off during  
charging of the flash.  
C Auto with Red-eye Reduction  
This camera uses advanced red-eye reduction (“In-Camera Red-Eye Fix”).  
Pre-flashes are fired repeatedly at low intensity before the main flash, reducing the red-eye effect.  
If the camera detects “red-eye” when a picture is taken, Nikon’s own In-Camera Red-Eye Fix processes  
the image before it is recorded.  
Note the following when taking pictures:  
Because pre-flashes are fired, there is a slight lag between when the shutter-release button is  
pressed and when the picture is shot.  
The time required to save the picture increases slightly.  
Advanced red-eye reduction may not produce the desired results in some situations.  
In extremely rare instances, areas not subject to red-eye may be affected by advanced red-eye  
reduction processing. In these cases, choose another mode and try again.  
The red-eye reduction process when NRW (RAW) images (A68) are recorded consists only of the  
pre-flashing before the main flash (including the JPEG image that is recorded at the same time).  
When Red-eye reduction (A177) in the setup menu is set to Pre-flash off, the shutter is released  
immediately when the shutter-release button is fully pressed, without firing the pre-flashes before the  
main flash.  
D More Information  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Taking Pictures with the Self-Timer  
The self-timer is suitable for taking group pictures and reducing the vibration when  
the shutter-release button is pressed. Timer durations of two or ten seconds can be  
selected.  
When using the self-timer, use of a tripod is recommended. Set Vibration  
reduction (A175) in the setup menu (A167) to Off when using a tripod to  
stabilize the camera.  
1
Press n(self-timer) on the rotary multi  
selector.  
The self-timer menu is displayed.  
2
Use the rotary multi selector to choose Y 10s  
or Y 2s and press the kbutton.  
Y 10s (ten seconds): suitable for group pictures.  
Y 2s (two seconds): suitable for preventing camera  
shake.  
Self-timer  
The mode selected for the self-timer is displayed.  
If the kbutton is not pressed within a few seconds, the  
selection is set and the setting menu disappears.  
3
4
Frame the picture and press the  
shutter-release button halfway.  
10  
The focus and exposure are set.  
1/250  
F5.6  
Press the shutter-release button the  
rest of the way down.  
9
The self-timer starts, and the number of  
seconds remaining before the shutter is  
released is displayed. The self-timer lamp  
blinks while the timer is counting down.  
About one second before the shutter is  
released, the lamp stops blinking and remains  
lit.  
1/250  
F5.6  
When the shutter is released, the self-timer  
turns Off.  
To stop the timer before a picture is taken,  
press the shutter-release button again.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Taking Pictures of Smiling Faces (Smile Timer)  
The camera detects smiling faces using face detection and releases the shutter  
automatically. The skin softening function makes a human subject’s skin appear  
smoother.  
This can be used when the shooting mode (A44) is A(auto) mode, the Portrait  
or Night portrait scene mode, or A, B, C, D, E, F, Nor O(low noise night)  
mode.  
1
Press n(self-timer) on the rotary multi  
selector.  
The self-timer menu is displayed.  
Change any flash mode, exposure compensation, or  
shooting menu settings before pressing the nbutton.  
2
Use the rotary multi selector to choose a  
(Smile timer), and press the kbutton.  
If the kbutton is not pressed within a few seconds, the  
selection is set and the setting menu disappears.  
Smile timer  
3
4
Frame the picture.  
Point the camera at the subject.  
When the camera detects a face, the focus area  
containing the face is displayed with a double border.  
Up to three faces can be detected. When more than  
one face is detected, the face closest to the center of  
the frame is framed by a double border and the others  
by single borders.  
1/250  
F5.6  
32  
Press the shutter-release button fully.  
The camera begins searching for smiling faces, and when the camera detects a smiling  
face of the subject framed by the double border, the shutter is released automatically.  
Each time the shutter is released, automatic shooting using face detection and smiling  
face detection is repeated.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Taking Pictures of Smiling Faces (Smile Timer)  
5
Press the shutter-release button when the required pictures have been  
taken.  
Automatic shooting ends.  
Shooting also ends in the situations below.  
- When 12 pictures have been taken  
- When five minutes have passed since pressing the shutter-release button in step 4  
and no smiling faces have been detected  
B Notes on Smile timer  
The digital zoom is not available.  
When the smile timer is selected, the monitor is not turned off even when the xbutton is pressed  
Under some shooting conditions, faces and smiling faces may not be detected properly.  
See “Notes on Face Priority” (A87) for more information.  
This feature cannot be used simultaneously with certain features. See “Functions that Cannot be  
Applied Simultaneously” (A108) for more information.  
B Notes on Skin Softening  
In images taken with the Smile timer, the camera makes the subject’s skin appear smoother (up to  
three people), and then records the image (Skin softening function). This means that the image  
recording time is longer than usual.  
Depending on shooting conditions, even if the camera detects a face on the monitor at the time  
of shooting, effects of the skin softening function may not be visible, and areas other than the face  
may be processed.  
The extent of skin softening effect that is applied cannot be set.  
Skin softening can also be applied to pictures after they have been taken (A139).  
C Operation of the Self-Timer Lamp for Smile timer  
When the camera detects a face after the shutter-release button is pressed in step 4, the self-timer  
lamp blinks. Immediately before the shutter is released, the self-timer lamp turns off.  
D More Information  
See “Autofocus” (A29) for more information.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Shooting with Remote Control  
Use the remote control ML-L3 (available separately) (A200) to release the shutter.  
It is convenient for taking self-portraits and effectively eliminates blur caused by  
camera shake that occurs when the shutter-release button is pressed.  
Use of a tripod is recommended during shooting with the remote control. Set  
Vibration reduction (A175) in the setup menu (A167) to Off when using a  
tripod to stabilize the camera.  
1
Press n(self-timer) on the rotary multi  
selector.  
The self-timer menu is displayed.  
2
3
Choose Remote control mode using the rotary  
multi selector and press the kbutton.  
Z (quick-response remote): Press the send button on  
the remote control to shoot instantly.  
Z 10s (ten seconds remote): Press the send button on  
the remote control to shoot ten seconds after the  
camera has focused.  
Remote control  
Z 2s (two seconds remote): Press the send button on the remote control to shoot two  
seconds after the camera has focused.  
The icon for the selected remote control mode is displayed.  
If the kbutton is not pressed within a few seconds, the selection is set and the setting  
menu disappears.  
Frame the picture.  
1/250  
F5.6  
32  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Shooting with Remote Control  
4
Aim the transmitter at the infrared receiver  
on the front or rear of the camera (A4, 5)  
and press the send button.  
Rear  
Front  
Press the send button from a distance of 5 m (16 ft.)  
or less.  
In the quick-response remote mode, once the  
subject is in focus, the shutter is released.  
In ten seconds or two seconds remote mode, the  
self-timer lamp blinks when the subject is in focus,  
and then about one second before the shutter is  
released, the lamp stops blinking and remains lit. To  
stop the timer before a picture is taken, press the  
send button again.  
When the shutter is released in ten seconds or two seconds remote mode, the remote  
control mode turns to Off.  
B Note on the Remote Control  
When shooting with Continuous or BSS, or the Sports or Museum scene mode, press the shutter-  
release button to shoot. Press the send button on the remote control to shoot one picture at a time.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using Focus Mode  
Choose a focus mode according to the subject and composition.  
Autofocus  
A
The camera automatically adjusts the focus according to the distance to the subject.  
Use when the distance from the subject to the lens is 50 cm (1 ft. 8 in.) or more, or 80  
cm (2 ft. 8 in.) or more at the maximum telephoto position.  
Macro close-up  
D
Use for close-ups of flowers or small objects.  
When the F mark on the monitor lights in green (when the zoom indicator is to the  
wide-angle side of the K icon), the camera can focus on subjects as close as about  
2 cm (0.8 in.) from the lens. The closest distance at which the camera can focus varies  
depending on the zoom position.  
Infinity  
B
Use when shooting distant scenes through window glass or when shooting  
landscapes.  
When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the AF lamp always lights in  
green. However, the camera may not be able to focus on nearby objects. The flash  
mode is set to W(Off).  
Manual focus  
E
The focus can be adjusted for any subject that is a distance of 2 cm (0.8 in.) to infinity  
from the lens (A42).  
Focus Modes Available in Each Shooting Mode  
A, B, C, D,  
E, F, N  
A
y
O
D
1
1
1
1
A (Autofocus)  
D (Macro close-up)  
B (Infinity)  
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
2
E (Manual focus)  
1
2
Default setting for each shooting mode.  
Available focus modes and default setting vary between different scene modes (  
46 to 55).  
C Focus Mode Setting  
For shooting modes A, B, Cand D, the changed focus mode setting is stored in the camera’s  
memory even after the camera is turned off.  
This feature cannot be used simultaneously with certain features. See “Functions that Cannot be  
Applied Simultaneously” (A108) for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
40  
         
Using Focus Mode  
Setting the Focus Mode  
1
Press p(focus mode) on the rotary  
multi selector.  
The focus mode menu is displayed.  
Autofocus  
2
Use the rotary multi selector to choose the  
desired focus mode and press the kbutton.  
The mode selected for focus mode is displayed.  
When A (Autofocus) is applied, P is only displayed for  
a few seconds even if monitor indicators (A14) are  
turned on.  
1/250  
F5.6  
32  
If the kbutton is not pressed within a few seconds, the  
selection is set and the setting menu disappears.  
C Macro Close-up  
When using A, B, C, D, E, For Nmode, or D(movie) mode, if Autofocus mode (A102) in  
the shooting menu is set to Full-time AF, the camera will continually focus until you press the  
shutter-release button halfway and the focus locks. A sound will be heard while the camera focuses.  
When using other shooting modes, Full-time AF is turned on automatically when macro mode is  
turned on.  
C Infinity  
If you set focus mode to infinity while using A(auto) mode, A, B, C, D, E, For Nmode, or O  
(low noise night) mode, the focus area does not appear on the screen.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using Focus Mode  
Using Manual Focus  
Available when the shooting mode is A, B, C, D, E, F, Nor O(low noise  
night). Select a shooting mode with the mode dial (A44).  
1
Press p(focus mode) on the rotary  
multi selector to display the setup  
menu for focus mode.  
Use the rotary multi selector to choose E  
(manual focus) and press the kbutton.  
Manual focus  
W is displayed on the top of the screen,  
and the image area and the enlarged  
center of the picture are displayed at the same time.  
2
Adjust the focus.  
Use the rotary multi selector to adjust the focus while  
viewing the image on the monitor.  
Press Hto focus on far subjects.  
Press Ito focus on near subjects.  
1/250  
F5.6  
When Kis pressed, first the camera is focused with  
autofocus, and then the manual focus can be operated.  
Choose Yes and press the kbutton to focus on the subject in the center of the screen  
with autofocus.  
Press the shutter-release button halfway to check the composition. Press the shutter-  
release button the rest of the way down to take the picture.  
3
Press the kbutton.  
The set focus is locked. You can continue shooting with  
the locked focus.  
To readjust the focus, press the kbutton again to  
display the screen in step 2.  
1/250  
F5.6  
32  
To change back to autofocus, return to step 1 and choose  
any setting other than E.  
C E (Manual Focus)  
Press the shutter-release button halfway to preview an approximate depth of field (the area in focus  
behind and in front of the subject).  
The digital zoom is not available.  
Focus mode changes to A (Autofocus) when the monitor is turned off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
42  
   
Adjusting the Brightness (Exposure Compensation)  
When exposure compensation is set for shooting, the brightness of the entire  
image can be adjusted to make it brighter or darker.  
1
Select the compensation value by rotating the  
exposure compensation dial.  
To make the subject brighter: adjust the exposure  
compensation to the “+” side.  
To make the subject darker: adjust the exposure  
compensation to the “–” side.  
Exposurecompensation  
dial mark  
When set to a value other than 0.0, the H mark and  
compensation value are displayed on the monitor and  
the exposure compensation dial mark turns on when  
shooting.  
1/250  
F5.6  
32  
2
Press the shutter-release button to take the picture.  
C Exposure Compensation Value  
When the shooting mode is D(manual) mode (A65) and the scene mode is Fireworks show  
(A54), the exposure compensation cannot be used.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
More on Shooting  
Selecting a Shooting Mode (Mode Dial)  
When the mode dial is rotated next to the mark, the camera switches to the  
corresponding shooting mode shown below.  
1342  
1/250  
F5.6  
D(Movie) mode (A146)  
A, B, C, D(A60)  
High-definition movies  
can be shot with sound.  
Choose these modes for  
greater control over  
shutter speed and  
aperture value.  
yScene (A45)  
Shoot with settings  
suitable for the scene  
simply by choosing one of  
the scene modes.  
In scene auto selector  
mode, the camera  
automatically selects the  
optimum scene mode for  
simpler shooting.  
A
Auto mode (A24)  
An automatic, “point-and-  
shoot” mode  
recommended for first-  
time users of digital  
cameras.  
E, F, NUser settings  
Up to three setting  
combinations that are  
frequently used for  
shooting can be saved in  
E, Fand N. The  
saved settings can be  
immediately retrieved for  
shooting simply by  
rotating the mode dial to  
E, For N.  
O
Low noise night mode  
Shoot with the ISO  
sensitivity controlled  
automatically to a high  
level and withouttheflash,  
to capture the atmosphere  
of a low-lit scene.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Selecting Scenes for Shooting (Scene Mode)  
You can shoot with settings suitable for the scene simply by choosing one of the  
following scene modes.  
x
Scene auto selector fParty/indoor  
jNight landscape nCopy  
bPortrait  
Z Beach  
z Snow  
kClose-up  
u Food  
oBacklighting  
pPanorama assist  
cLandscape  
dSports  
hSunset  
lMuseum  
mFireworks show  
eNight portrait  
iDusk/dawn  
Setting the Scene Mode  
1
2
Rotate the mode dial to y.  
The camera enters scene mode. The default setting is  
x(scene auto selector).  
Press the d button to display the  
scene menu screen, choose the  
desired scene with the rotary multi  
selector and press the k button.  
Scene menu  
Scene auto selector  
Portrait  
Landscape  
Sports  
Night portrait  
Party/indoor  
Beach  
Switch to the Ctab when the scene menu  
is not displayed (A14).  
3
Frame the subject and take the  
picture.  
For scene modes that use the flash, be  
sure to press the K (flash pop-up)  
button to raise the built-in flash before  
shooting.  
1/250  
F5.6  
C Image Quality and Image Size  
Rotate the quick menu dial to a and press the quick menu button to set Image quality (A68)  
and Image size (A70). The setting is also applied to other shooting modes (except for low noise  
night mode, and shooting modes E, F and N).  
NRW (RAW) images cannot be recorded in scene mode.  
D Displaying the Scene Descriptions (Help Displays)  
Choose a scene type in the scene menu (step 2) and rotate the zoom control to g (j) to display the  
description of the scene. To return to the original screen, rotate the zoom control again to g (j).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
45  
         
Selecting Scenes for Shooting (Scene Mode)  
Shooting in the Scene Selected by the Camera (Scene Auto  
Selector)  
By simply framing a picture, the camera automatically selects the optimum scene  
mode for simpler shooting. When the camera is aimed at a subject in x Scene  
auto selector mode, the camera automatically selects one of the following scene  
modes.  
Auto (general shooting)  
Night landscape (A51)  
Portrait (A48)  
Close-up (A52)  
Landscape (A48)  
Night portrait (A49)  
Backlighting (A55)  
1
Rotate the mode dial to y.  
2
Press the d button to display  
the scene menu, choose x Scene  
auto selector with the rotary multi  
selector and press the k button.  
Scene menu  
Scene auto selector  
Portrait  
Landscape  
Sports  
Night portrait  
Party/indoor  
Beach  
Scene auto selector is enabled.  
When the built-in flash is not raised, the  
message The flash is lowered. is  
displayed.  
Press the K (flash pop-up) button to raise the built-in flash.  
3
Frame the subject and take the picture.  
When the camera automatically selects a scene mode,  
the shooting mode icon changes to that for the scene  
mode currently enabled.  
d: Auto mode  
e: Portrait  
g: Night landscape  
i: Close-up  
1/250  
F5.6  
1342  
f: Landscape  
h: Night portrait  
j: Backlighting  
Press the shutter-release button halfway to set the focus and exposure. When the  
subject is in focus, the focus area (active focus area) lights in green.  
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to take the picture.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Selecting Scenes for Shooting (Scene Mode)  
B Notes on Scene Auto Selector  
The digital zoom is not available.  
Depending upon shooting conditions, the camera may not select the desired scene mode. Should  
this occur, switch to A(Auto) mode (A24) or choose the desired scene mode manually (A48).  
C Focusing in Scene Auto Selector  
In scene auto selector, the camera detects and focuses on a face (see “Shooting with Face Priority”  
(A86) for more information).  
When the shooting mode icon is d or i (close-up), in the same way as when the AF area  
mode (A84) is set to Auto, the camera automatically selects one or more of the nine focus areas  
containing the subject closest to the camera.  
C Note on Flash  
U (Auto) (default setting) or W(Off) flash mode settings (A32) can be applied.  
-
When U (Auto) is applied, the camera automatically chooses the optimum flash mode setting  
for the scene mode it has selected.  
-
When W(Off) is set, the flash does not fire even when the built-in flash is raised.  
If you do not want to use the built-in flash, you can shoot while the built-in flash is lowered.  
C Functions Available in Scene Auto Selector  
Self-timer (A35) and exposure compensation (A43) settings can be adjusted.  
The p(focus mode) button (A12, 40) and G (AF area mode) button (A12, 84) on the rotary  
multi selector are not available.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting Scenes for Shooting (Scene Mode)  
Selecting a Scene Mode to Take Pictures (Features)  
for more information on Scene auto selector scene mode.  
The Xshown for each scene is the setting for the flash mode when the built-in  
flash is raised (A32). nis the setting for the self-timer (A35), remote control  
(A38) and Smile timer (A36), and pis the setting for focus mode (A40).  
bPortrait  
Use this mode for taking portraits in which the main subject  
stands out clearly.  
The camera automatically detects and focuses on a face (see  
“Shooting with Face Priority” (A86) for more information).  
If the camera detects multiple faces, the camera focuses on the face closest to the camera.  
After the skin softening feature makes the subject’s skin appear smoother (up to three  
people), the camera records the image (A37).  
If no face is recognized, the camera focuses on the subject in the center of the frame.  
The digital zoom is not available.  
X
V*  
Other settings can be selected.  
n
Off*  
p
A
*
cLandscape  
Use this mode for vivid landscapes and cityscapes.  
The camera focuses at infinity. When the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway, the AF lamp always lights in green.  
However, because the camera focuses at infinity, it may not  
be able to focus on nearby objects.  
AF-assist illuminator (A177) does not light.  
X
W
n
Off*  
The self-timer and remote control are available.  
p
B
*
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Selecting Scenes for Shooting (Scene Mode)  
dSports  
Use this mode for dynamic action shots that freeze the action in  
a single shot and record motion in a series of pictures. With  
continuous shooting, instantaneous movements of moving  
subjects can be captured clearly.  
The camera focuses on the subject in the center of the frame.  
The camera continuously focuses using autofocus until you  
press the shutter-release button halfway to lock the focus.  
While the shutter-release button is fully held down, up to 45 pictures are shot at a rate of  
about 1.3 frames per second (fps) when Image quality is set to Normal and Image size is  
set to M 3648×2736.  
Focus, exposure compensation, and white balance are fixed at values determined with the  
first shot in each series.  
The frame rate with continuous shooting may vary, depending upon the current image  
quality setting, image size setting, and the memory card used.  
AF-assist illuminator (A177) does not light.  
*
A
X
W
n
Off  
p
*
E (manual focus) can be selected.  
eNight portrait  
OQ  
Use this mode for portraits of a human subject shot in front of  
background lighting at night. Flash is used to illuminate the  
subject while maintaining the mood of the background.  
Shoot pictures with the built-in flash raised.  
The camera automatically detects and focuses on a face (see  
“Shooting with Face Priority” (A86) for more information).  
If the camera detects multiple faces, the camera focuses on  
the face closest to the camera.  
After the skin softening feature makes the subject’s skin appear smoother (up to three  
people), the camera records the image (A37).  
If no face is recognized, the camera focuses on the subject in the center of the frame.  
The digital zoom is not available.  
1
2
X
V
n
Off  
p
A
1
2
Fixed to fill flash with slow sync and red-eye reduction.  
Other settings can be selected.  
O: Indicates a tripod is recommended when using this scene mode. Turn Vibration reduction  
(A175) to Off when using a tripod.  
Q: Noise reduction is performed for pictures shot in scene modes with Q, so they may take longer  
to record.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Selecting Scenes for Shooting (Scene Mode)  
fParty/indoor  
Suitable for taking pictures in parties. Captures the effects of  
candlelight and other indoor background lighting.  
The camera focuses on the subject in the center of the frame.  
Hold the camera steadily as pictures are easily affected by  
camera shake. When shooting under low lighting, use of a tripod  
is recommended. Set Vibration reduction  
(A175) to Off  
when using a tripod to stabilize the camera during shooting.  
1
2
X
V
n
Off  
p
A
1
2
May automatically switch to slow sync with red-eye reduction. Other settings can be selected.  
The self-timer and remote control are available.  
Z Beach  
Captures the brightness of such subjects as beaches, or sunlit  
expanses of water.  
The camera focuses on the subject in the center of the frame.  
1
2
X
U
n
Off  
p
A
1
2
Other settings can be selected.  
The self-timer and remote control are available.  
z Snow  
Captures the brightness of such subjects as sunlit snowfields.  
The camera focuses on the subject in the center of the frame.  
1
2
X
U
n
Off  
p
A
1
2
Other settings can be selected.  
The self-timer and remote control are available.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Selecting Scenes for Shooting (Scene Mode)  
hSunset  
Preserves the deep hues seen in sunsets and sunrises.  
O
The camera focuses on the subject in the center of the frame.  
1
2
U
X
n
Off  
p
A
1
2
Other settings can be selected.  
The self-timer and remote control are available.  
iDusk/dawn  
OQ  
Preserves the colors seen in the weak natural light before sunrise  
or after sunset.  
The camera focuses at infinity. When the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway, the AF lamp always lights in green.  
However, because the camera focuses at infinity, it may not be  
able to focus on nearby objects.  
AF-assist illuminator (A177) does not light.  
*
X
W
n
Off  
The self-timer and remote control are available.  
jNight landscape  
p
B
*
OQ  
Slow shutter speeds are used to produce stunning night  
landscapes.  
The camera focuses at infinity. When the shutter-release button  
is pressed halfway, the AF lamp always lights in green. However,  
because the camera focuses at infinity, it may not be able to  
focus on nearby objects.  
AF-assist illuminator (A177) does not light.  
*
X
W
n
Off  
p
B
*
The self-timer and remote control are available.  
O: Indicates a tripod is recommended when using this scene mode. Turn Vibration reduction  
(A175) to Off when using a tripod.  
Q: Noise reduction is performed for pictures shot in scene modes with Q, so they may take longer  
to record.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Selecting Scenes for Shooting (Scene Mode)  
kClose-up  
Photograph flowers, insects and other small objects at close  
range.  
The focus mode (  
up) and the camera automatically zooms to the closest position  
at which it can focus.  
40) setting is changed to  
D
(Macro close-  
When the F mark on the monitor lights in green (when the zoom indicator is to the wide-  
angle side of the K icon), the camera can focus on subjects as close as about 2 cm (0.8 in.)  
from the lens. The closest distance at which the camera can focus varies depending on the  
zoom position.  
AF area mode is changed to Manual to enable the focus area to be chosen (A84). Press  
the kbutton, and then rotate the rotary multi selector, or press H, I, Jor Kto move  
the focus area. When the focus area position is set by pressing the kbutton, the flash  
mode, self-timer or exposure compensation settings can be adjusted.  
The camera continuously focuses using autofocus until you press the shutter-release  
button halfway to lock the focus.  
As pictures are easily affected by camera shake, be sure that Vibration reduction  
(A175) is enabled and hold the camera steadily.  
1
2
X
U
n
Off  
p
p
1
Other settings can be selected. Note that when shooting with the flash, the flash may be unable  
to light the entire subject at distances of less than 50 cm (1 ft. 8 in.).  
The self-timer and remote control are available.  
2
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Selecting Scenes for Shooting (Scene Mode)  
u Food  
Use this mode when taking pictures of food.  
The focus mode (A40) setting is changed to D (Macro  
close-up) and the camera automatically zooms to the closest  
position at which it can focus.  
When the F mark on the monitor lights in green (when the zoom indicator is to the wide-  
angle side of the K icon), the camera can focus on subjects as close as about 2 cm (0.8  
in.) from the lens. The closest distance at which the camera can focus varies depending on  
the zoom position.  
You can adjust hue within a slider display at the left of the  
monitor. Pressing H increases the red hue, and pressing I  
increases the blue hue. The hue adjustments are stored in the  
camera’s memory even after the camera is turned off.  
1/250  
F5.6  
1342  
AF area mode is changed to Manual to enable the focus area to be chosen (A84). Press  
the k button, and then rotate the rotary multi selector, or press H, I, J or K to move  
the focus area. When the focus area position is set by pressing the k button, the hue  
adjustment, self-timer and exposure compensation settings can be adjusted.  
The camera focuses continuously until focus is locked by pressing the shutter-release  
button halfway.  
As pictures are easily affected by camera shake, be sure that Vibration reduction  
(A175) is enabled and hold the camera steadily.  
*
X
W
n
Off  
p
p
*
The self-timer and remote control are available.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Selecting Scenes for Shooting (Scene Mode)  
lMuseum  
Use indoors where flash photography is prohibited (for example,  
in museums and art galleries) or in other situations in which you  
do not want to use the flash.  
The camera focuses on the subject in the center of the frame.  
BSS (Best Shot Selector) ( 99) can be used for shooting.  
As pictures are easily affected by camera shake, be sure that  
Vibration reduction (A175) is enabled and hold the  
camera steadily.  
AF-assist illuminator (A177) does not light.  
2
1
A
X
W
n
Off  
p
1
The self-timer and remote control are available.  
2
D (Macro close-up) can be selected.  
mFireworks show  
O
Slow shutter speeds are used to capture the expanding burst of  
light from fireworks.  
The camera focuses at infinity. When the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway, the AF lamp always lights in green.  
However, because the camera focuses at infinity, it may not be  
able to focus on nearby objects.  
Exposure compensation (A43) cannot be used.  
AF-assist illuminator (A177) does not light.  
X
W
n
Off*  
p
B
*
The quick-response remote is available.  
nCopy  
Provides clear pictures of text or drawings on a white board or  
in print.  
The camera focuses on the subject in the center of the frame.  
Use p(Macro close-up) mode (A40) in focus mode with  
this mode to shoot pictures at close distances.  
Colored text and drawings may not show up well.  
3
1
2
A
X
U
n
Off  
p
1
2
3
Other settings can be selected.  
The self-timer and remote control are available.  
D (Macro close-up) can be selected.  
O: Indicates a tripod is recommended when using this scene mode. Turn Vibration reduction  
(A175) to Off when using a tripod.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
54  
     
Selecting Scenes for Shooting (Scene Mode)  
oBacklighting  
Use to “fill-in” (illuminate) shadows and backlit subjects. The  
flash fires automatically to “fill in” (illuminate) shadows.  
Shoot pictures with the built-in flash raised.  
The camera focuses on the subject in the center of the frame.  
*
X
X
n
Off  
The self-timer and remote control are available.  
pPanorama assist  
p
A
*
Use when shooting a series of pictures that can later be joined on a computer to form a  
single panorama, using the supplied Panorama Maker 5 software. See “Taking Pictures for a  
Panorama” (A56) for more information.  
3
1
2
A
X
U
n
Off  
p
1
2
3
Other settings can be selected.  
The self-timer and remote control are available.  
D (Macro close-up) or B (Infinity) can be selected.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Selecting Scenes for Shooting (Scene Mode)  
Taking Pictures for a Panorama  
The camera focuses on the subject in the center of the frame. Using a tripod makes  
the composition easier. When the camera is stabilized with a tripod, set Vibration  
reduction (A175) to Off in the setup menu (A167).  
1
2
Rotate the mode dial to y.  
Press the dbutton to display the  
scene menu screen, choose  
pPanorama assist with the rotary  
multi selector and press the k  
button.  
Scene menu  
Fireworks show  
Copy  
Backlighting  
Panorama assist  
The I icon is displayed to show the  
direction in which pictures are joined.  
3
4
Use the rotary multi selector to choose the  
direction and press the kbutton.  
Select the direction in which pictures are joined in the  
completed panorama: right (I), left (J), up (K) or  
down (L).  
1/250  
F5.6  
1342  
The yellow icon (II) moves to the direction pressed, so  
press the kbutton to choose the direction. A white  
icon (I) is displayed in the chosen direction.  
Apply flash mode (A32), self-timer (A35)/remote control (A38), focus mode  
(A40) and exposure compensation (A43) settings with this step, if necessary.  
Press the kbutton again to reselect the direction.  
Shoot the first picture in the  
panorama series.  
The picture taken is displayed in 1/3 of the  
monitor.  
1/250  
F5.6  
1342  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Selecting Scenes for Shooting (Scene Mode)  
5
Shoot the second picture.  
Match the outline of the next picture so that  
1/3 of the frame overlaps the previous picture,  
and press the shutter-release button.  
Repeat until you have taken the necessary  
number of pictures to complete the image.  
EEnndd  
EEnndd  
1341  
6
Press the kbutton when shooting is  
completed.  
The camera returns to step 3.  
1339  
B Panorama Assist  
Set the flash mode, self-timer/remote control, focus mode and exposure compensation before  
releasing the shutter for the first picture. The settings cannot be changed after shooting the first  
picture. Pictures cannot be deleted, nor can zoom, Image quality (A68), or Image size (A70)  
be adjusted after shooting the first picture.  
The panorama series is terminated if the auto off function (A181) triggers the standby mode  
during shooting. To prevent this, setting a longer time for the auto off function is recommended.  
D R (exposure lock) Indicator  
When using panorama assist mode, all pictures in the panorama  
have the same exposure, white balance, and focus as the first picture  
of the panorama.  
When the first picture is shot, R is displayed to indicate that  
exposure, white balance, and focus are locked.  
EEnndd  
1341  
D Panorama Maker 5  
Install Panorama Maker 5 on a computer using the supplied ViewNX 2 CD-ROM.  
Transfer pictures to a computer (A156) and use Panorama Maker 5 (A160) to join them in a single  
panorama.  
D More Information  
See “File and Folder Names” (A203) for more information.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Shooting Low-lit Scenes (Low Noise Night Mode)  
The ISO sensitivity is controlled automatically to a high level. This allows you to  
capture the atmosphere of a low-lit scene and shoot pictures with a low amount of  
noise without using the flash. It also reduces the effects of camera shake and  
subject movement when shooting at the telephoto zoom position.  
The available image size is C 2048×1536 or smaller.  
The ISO sensitivity is set automatically within the range of ISO 400 to 12800.  
1
Rotate the mode dial to O (low noise night).  
The camera enters low noise night mode.  
2
Frame the subject and take the picture.  
In the default setting, the camera automatically selects  
one or more of the nine focus areas containing the  
subject closest to the camera. When the subject is in  
focus, the focus area (active focus area) lights in green  
(maximum of nine areas) (A84).  
To use the flash, raise the built-in flash.  
C Functions Available in Low Noise Night Mode  
The flash mode (A32) can be changed, and the self-timer (A35), focus mode (A40), AF area  
mode (A84) and exposure compensation (A43) can be adjusted.  
Rotate the quick menu dial to a or c and press the quick menu button to select the following  
settings.  
-
a: Image quality (A68) and Image size (A70)  
NRW (RAW) pictures cannot be recorded. Only the following image sizes are available:  
C 2048×1536 (default setting), B 1600×1200, A 1280×960, J 1024×768 and f  
640×480.  
The settings in Image quality and Image size are not applied to other shooting modes.  
-
c: White balance (A76)  
The functions in the low noise night menu can be set. See “Low Noise Night Menu” (A59) for  
more information.  
C Built-in ND Filter  
When the subject is too bright, set Built-in ND filter (A184) in the setup menu (A167) to reduce  
the light and shoot.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Shooting Low-lit Scenes (Low Noise Night Mode)  
B Notes on Low Noise Night Mode  
Although vibration is reduced even in low-lit environments, a tripod is recommended when not  
using a flash. Set Vibration reduction (A175) to Off when using a tripod to stabilize the camera.  
Because the shooting is performed with ISO sensitivity set to a high level, the shot picture may be  
grainy.  
Because the shooting is always performed at ISO 400 or higher, the appropriate exposure may not  
be obtained (overexposure) in clear sunlight.  
Focusing may be difficult in extremely dark environments.  
The slowest shutter speed is restricted to 1/4 second.  
D More Information  
See “Autofocus” (A29) for more information.  
Low Noise Night Menu  
In the low noise night mode, the following functions can be set when the d  
button (A13) is pressed to display the Olow noise night menu.  
The setting of low noise night menu is stored in the camera’s memory  
independently and is not applied to the settings in any other shooting mode.  
Continuous  
Continuous (A99) can be set. Choose Single or Continuous.  
Flash exp. comp.  
Flash exp. comp. (A102) can be set.  
Metering  
Displaying the Low Noise Night Menu  
Rotate the mode dial to O(low noise night) mode.  
Press the dbutton (A13) to display the menu, and use the rotary multi selector  
to change to the Otab (A14).  
Use the rotary multi selector to select and set menu options (A12).  
To exit the low noise night menu, press the dbutton.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Setting the Exposure for Shooting (A, B, C, DModes)  
A, B, C, DModes  
By rotating the mode dial, you can shoot pictures in the following four exposure  
modes: A(Programmed auto), B(Shutter-priority auto), C(Aperture-priority auto),  
and D(Manual). Not only you can set the shutter speed and aperture value  
yourself, but you can also select a variety of advanced settings, such as changing  
the ISO sensitivity and white balance with the quick menu dial (A10, 67).  
Mode  
Description  
Usage  
The camera sets the shutter  
speed and aperture value  
automatically for optimal  
exposure. Flexible program,  
which changes the combination  
of shutter speed and aperture  
value, can be used (A62).  
Programmed  
auto  
Recommended for most  
situations.  
A
B
Use to shoot fast moving  
The user chooses the shutter  
speed; the camera selects the  
aperture value automatically.  
subjects using a fast shutter  
speed, or use to emphasize the  
movements of a moving subject  
using a slow shutter speed.  
Shutter-  
priority auto  
The user chooses the aperture  
value; the camera selects the  
shutter speed automatically.  
Use to blur the background or  
bring both the foreground and  
background into focus.  
Aperture-  
priority auto  
C
D
Use to control the exposure  
according to shooting  
requirements.  
The user controls both the  
shutter speed and aperture value.  
Manual  
Even when the mode dial is set to E, For N(user setting mode), you can  
shoot in A(Programmed auto), B(Shutter-priority auto), C(Aperture-priority auto)  
or D(Manual). The setting combinations (user settings) that are frequently used for  
shooting can be saved in E, Fand N(A112).  
C Functions Available in A, B, Cand DModes  
The flash mode (A32) can be changed, and the self-timer (A35), focus mode (A40), AF area  
mode (A84) and exposure compensation (A43) settings can be adjusted.  
Rotate the quick menu dial and press the quick menu button to set the quick menu (A10, 67).  
Press the dbutton to adjust the shooting menu (A90) settings.  
C Built-in ND Filter  
When the subject is too bright, set Built-in ND filter (A184) in the setup menu (A167) to reduce  
the light and shoot.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Setting the Exposure for Shooting (A, B, C, DModes)  
D Shutter Speed and Aperture Value  
The same exposure can be achieved with different combinations  
of shutter speed and aperture value, allowing you to freeze or blur  
motion and control depth of field. The following figure shows how  
shutter speed and aperture value affect exposure. When the ISO  
sensitivity setting (A74) is changed, the range of shutter speeds  
and aperture values at which the correct exposure can be  
obtained also changes.  
1342  
1/250  
F5.6  
Aperture  
value  
Shutter speed  
Adjusting the Shutter Speed  
Faster  
Slower  
1/1000 s  
1/30 s  
Adjusting the Aperture Value  
Larger aperture  
(Small f-number)  
f/2.8  
Smaller aperture  
(Large f-number)  
f/8  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting the Exposure for Shooting (A, B, C, DModes)  
A(Programmed Auto) Mode  
The camera sets the shutter speed and aperture value automatically for optimal  
exposure.  
1
Rotate the mode dial to A.  
1342  
1/250  
F5.6  
2
Frame the subject and shoot.  
In the default setting, the camera automatically selects  
one or more of the nine focus areas containing the  
subject closest to the camera. When the subject is in  
focus, the focus area (active focus area) lights in green  
(maximum of nine areas) (A84).  
Flexible Program  
In mode A(Programmed auto), different combinations of shutter  
speed and aperture value can be selected by rotating the command  
dial without changing the exposure (“flexible program”). While  
flexible program is in effect, a flexible program mark (A) appears  
next to the mode indicator (A) in the upper left of the monitor.  
Rotate the command dial to the right for large apertures (small f-  
numbers) when you want to blur background details, or for fast  
shutter speeds to capture fast-moving subjects.  
Rotate the command dial to the left for small apertures (large f-  
numbers) when you want to increase depth of field, or for slow  
shutter speeds to emphasize the motion of a subject.  
To cancel flexible program, rotate the command dial until the  
flexible program mark (A) is no longer displayed. Selecting  
another mode, or turning off the camera, also cancels flexible  
program.  
1342  
1/500  
F4.0  
B Notes on A(Programmed Auto) Shooting  
When the subject is too dark or too bright, it may not be possible to obtain the appropriate exposure.  
In such cases, the shutter speed indicator and aperture value indicator blink when the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway. It may be possible to obtain the appropriate exposure by changing settings  
such as the built-in ND filter (A184) and ISO sensitivity (A74).  
C Shutter Speed  
The shutter speed may be restricted by other settings. See “Functions that Cannot be Applied  
Simultaneously” (A108) for more information.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setting the Exposure for Shooting (A, B, C, DModes)  
B(Shutter-Priority Auto) Mode  
The user chooses the shutter speed; the camera selects the aperture value  
automatically.  
The shutter speed can be set in a range from a maximum speed of 1/2000 to  
eight seconds.  
1
Rotate the mode dial to B.  
2
3
Rotate the command dial to choose  
a shutter speed value.  
When the Av/Tv button is pressed, the  
shutter speed can be set by rotating the  
rotary multi selector (default setting,  
A187).  
1/250  
F5.6  
1342  
Focus and shoot.  
In the default setting, the camera automatically selects  
one or more of the nine focus areas containing the  
subject closest to the camera. When the subject is in  
focus, the focus area (active focus area) lights in green  
(maximum of nine areas) (A84).  
B B(Shutter-Priority Auto) Mode  
When the subject is too dark or too bright, it may not be possible to obtain the appropriate  
exposure with the set shutter speed. In such cases, the shutter speed indicator blinks when the  
shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Choose another shutter speed and try again.  
At shutter speeds of 1/4 second or slower, “noise” may appear in the image in the form of randomly  
spaced, brightly colored dots. In such situations, the shutter speed indicator turns red. Setting  
Long exposure NR (A103) to On is recommended.  
C Shutter Speed  
The shutter speed may be restricted by other settings. See “Functions that Cannot be Applied  
Simultaneously” (A108) for more information.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setting the Exposure for Shooting (A, B, C, DModes)  
C(Aperture-Priority Auto) Mode  
The user chooses the aperture value; the camera selects the shutter speed  
automatically.  
1
Rotate the mode dial to C.  
2
Rotate the rotary multi selector to  
choose the aperture value  
(f/-number).  
The aperture value can be set in a range of  
f/2.8 to 8 (wide-angle side) and f/5.6 to 8  
(telephoto side).  
1342  
1/250  
F5.6  
When the Av/Tv button is pressed, the  
aperture value can be set by rotating the command dial (default setting, A187).  
3
Focus and shoot.  
In the default setting, the camera automatically selects  
one or more of the nine focus areas containing the  
subject closest to the camera. When the subject is in  
focus, the focus area (active focus area) lights in green  
(maximum of nine areas) (A84).  
B C(Aperture-Priority Auto) Mode  
When the subject is too dark or too bright, it may not be possible to obtain the appropriate exposure  
with the set aperture value. In such cases, the aperture value indicator blinks when the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway. Choose another aperture value and try again.  
C Shutter Speed  
When the zoom is on the wide-angle side and the aperture value is set to f/8 (minimum aperture),  
the shutter speed can be set to up to 1/4000 second.  
The shutter speed may be restricted by other settings. See “Functions that Cannot be Applied  
Simultaneously” (A108) for more information.  
D Aperture and Zoom  
The aperture value (f-number) indicates the lens brightness. Large apertures (expressed by small f-  
numbers) let more light into the camera, and small apertures (large f-numbers) let less light. When the  
camera is zoomed in, the lens aperture can be changed within a range of f/2.8 to 5.6. The aperture  
value increases (becomes darker) when zooming to the telephoto side, and decreases (becomes  
brighter) when zooming to the wide-angle side.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting the Exposure for Shooting (A, B, C, DModes)  
D(Manual) Mode  
The user controls both the shutter speed and aperture value.  
The shutter speed can be set in a range from a maximum speed of 1/4000 to  
60 seconds.  
1
Rotate the mode dial to D.  
2
Rotate the command dial to choose  
a shutter speed value.  
At shutter speeds of 1/4 second or slower,  
the shutter speed indicator turns red  
1/125  
F5.6  
1342  
When adjusting the aperture value or  
shutter speed, the degree of deviation  
from the exposure value measured by the  
camera is displayed in the exposure  
indicator.  
Exposure indicator  
Overexposed  
+3  
The degree of deviation in the exposure  
indicator is shown in EVs (–3 to +3 EV in  
increments of 1/3 EV).  
+0  
The display on the right shows that the  
picture will be overexposed by 1 EV (+1).  
-3 Underexposed  
3
Rotate the rotary multi selector to  
choose an aperture value.  
Repeat steps 2 to 3 to modify shutter speed  
and aperture value settings until the  
desired exposure is achieved.  
1/125  
F8.0  
1342  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting the Exposure for Shooting (A, B, C, DModes)  
4
Focus and shoot.  
In the default setting, the camera automatically selects  
one or more of the nine focus areas containing the  
subject closest to the camera. When the subject is in  
focus, the focus area (active focus area) lights in green  
(maximum of nine areas) (A84).  
B Note on ISO Sensitivity  
When ISO sensitivity (A74) is set to Auto (default setting), High ISO sensitivity auto, ISO 100-  
200 or ISO 100-400, ISO sensitivity is fixed at ISO 100.  
C Shutter Speed  
A shutter speed of 1/4000 second is available only when the zoom is on the wide-angle side and  
the aperture value is set to f/8 (minimum aperture).  
The shutter speed may be restricted by other settings. See “Functions that Cannot be Applied  
Simultaneously” (A108) for more information.  
C Shutter Speed and Aperture Value Setting Methods  
When the Av/Tv button is pressed, the aperture value can be set  
with the command dial, and the shutter speed can be set by  
rotating the rotary multi selector (default setting, A187).  
Press the Av/Tv button again to return to the originally assigned  
functions of the command dial and the rotary multi selector.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changing the Frequently Used Settings for Shooting (  
A,  
B,  
C,  
DModes)  
While shooting in and , you can set the following options.  
A
,
B,  
C
,
D,  
E
,
F
N
Quick menu  
AF area mode (A84)  
Shooting menu (A90)  
Quick Menu  
The following functions can be set with the quick menu dial and the quick menu button.  
Quick menu dial mark  
Quick menu dial  
Quick menu button  
Dial  
position  
A, B, C, D,  
E, F, N  
Function  
A
y O  
D
A
Image quality/Image size w  
w
w
w
w
a
Movie options  
ISO sensitivity  
b
c
d
I
w
w
w
w
w
White balance  
Auto bracketing  
My Menu*  
w w 76  
e
Tone level information  
To use the quick menu, rotate the quick menu dial to align the mark with the  
function that you want to set.  
When the quick menu button is pressed while shooting, the quick menu dial  
mark turns on and the quick menu is displayed for the function that is selected  
with the mark.  
Use the rotary multi selector to set the various menu items. They can also be set  
using the command dial and the Av/Tv button.  
To exit the quick menu, press the quick menu button or the shutter-release  
button.  
* I(My Menu)  
Rotate the quick menu dial to I(My Menu) and  
press the quick menu button to display only the menu  
items that are frequently used for shooting.  
My Menu  
Picture Control  
Options that are displayed in My Menu can be  
changed from Customize My Menu (A187) in  
the setup menu (A167).  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Changing the Frequently Used Settings for Shooting (A, B, C, DModes)  
a Choosing the Image Quality and the Image Size  
You can set the image quality (compression ratio) and image size to be recorded.  
Image Quality  
Choose the compression ratio applied to pictures.  
Lower compression ratios result in higher quality pictures, but also larger file sizes,  
limiting the number of pictures that can be recorded.  
a
Fine  
Higher quality images than Normal, suitable for enlargement or high quality prints.  
File format: JPEG, compression ratio of 1:4  
Normal (default setting)  
b
Normal image quality, suitable for most applications.  
File format: JPEG, compression ratio of 1:8  
c Basic  
Basic image quality is lower than with Normal, suitable for pictures attached to e-  
mails or used on web pages.  
File format: JPEG, compression ratio of 1:16  
d
NRW (RAW) + Fine*  
Two images are recorded at the same time: one NRW (RAW) image and one fine-  
quality JPEG image.  
e
f
F
NRW (RAW) + Normal*  
Two images are recorded at the same time: one NRW (RAW) image and one normal-  
quality JPEG image.  
NRW (RAW) + Basic*  
Two images are recorded at the same time: one NRW (RAW) image and one basic-  
quality JPEG image.  
NRW (RAW)*  
Raw data from the image sensor are saved. Create JPEG image files after shooting  
using NRW (RAW) processing (A143) in the playback menu.  
When NRW (RAW) is selected, Image size is reset to M 3648×2736.  
White balance and COOLPIX Picture Control settings can be adjusted in NRW  
(RAW) processing.  
NRW (RAW) images cannot be printed. Creating JPEG images with NRW (RAW)  
processing enables the images to be printed using PictBridge compatible printers or in  
digital photo labs.  
File format: NRW (RAW)  
*
NRW (RAW) images cannot be chosen in scene mode or low noise night mode.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Changing the Frequently Used Settings for Shooting (A, B, C, DModes)  
C COOLPIX P7000 NRW (RAW) images  
The extension of the image taken is .NRW.”  
No editing other than NRW (RAW) processing can be performed for pictures in the NRW (RAW)  
format. To edit such pictures, first create JPEG pictures using NRW (RAW) processing (A143),  
and then edit the JPEG pictures.  
ViewNX 2 needs to be installed on the computer to be able to view NRW (RAW) images on the  
computer. Capture NX 2 is also compatible with NRW (RAW) images.  
Install ViewNX 2 on a computer using the supplied ViewNX 2 CD-ROM. (See “Installing ViewNX 2”  
of the Quick Start Guide.)  
For more information on using ViewNX 2, refer to the on-screen instructions and help information  
contained in ViewNX 2.  
C Notes on Image Quality Setting  
The setting for image quality is shown by an icon displayed on the monitor during shooting and  
playback (A6, 8).  
Can be set from the quick menu dial even in shooting modes other than A, B, Cand D(except  
for movie mode).  
The setting is also applied to other shooting modes (except for shooting modes E, Fand N).  
NRW (RAW) images cannot be recorded in scene mode or low noise night mode. When the image  
quality is set to NRW (RAW) and the scene mode is selected, the image quality is changed to  
Normal. When the image quality is set to NRW (RAW) + Fine, NRW (RAW) + Normal or NRW  
(RAW) + Basic and the scene mode is selected, the image quality for each is changed to Fine,  
Normal or Basic.  
The digital zoom cannot be used when Image quality is set to NRW (RAW), NRW (RAW) + Fine,  
NRW (RAW) + Normal or NRW (RAW) + Basic.  
This feature cannot be used simultaneously with certain features. See “Functions that Cannot be  
Applied Simultaneously” (A108) for more information.  
C Recording of NRW (RAW) and JPEG images at the same time  
The NRW (RAW) image and the JPEG image that are recorded at the same time have the same file  
number but their own file extensions, .NRWand .JPG” (A203).  
When playing back on the camera, only the JPEG image is displayed.  
Note that when the JPEG image is deleted by pressing the lbutton, the NRW (RAW) image that  
was recorded at the same time is also deleted.  
D More Information  
See “Number of Exposures Remaining” (A71) for more information.  
See “File and Folder Names” (A203) for more information.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changing the Frequently Used Settings for Shooting (A, B, C, DModes)  
Image Size  
You can set the JPEG image size (amount of pixels) for pictures recorded with an  
image quality of Fine, Normal or Basic.  
The larger the image, the larger the size at which it can be printed or displayed  
without becoming noticeably “grainy,” limiting the number of pictures that can be  
recorded.  
Conversely, small image sizes are suitable for pictures attached to e-mails or used  
on web pages. However, printing small images in large print sizes results in the  
image turning “grainy.”  
Image size  
Description  
3648×2736  
(default setting) or D 2592×1944.  
Record pictures with finer detail than those shot at E 3264×2448  
M
E
D
C
B
A
3264×2448  
2592×1944  
2048×1536  
1600×1200  
1280×960  
Good balance between file size and quality; suitable in most  
situations.  
Smaller than M 3648×2736, E 3264×2448 and  
D 2592×1944; for recording more pictures.  
Record pictures of a size suitable for display on devices such as a  
computer monitor.  
J
f
I
1024×768  
640×480  
Record pictures suitable for display on a television with a screen  
aspect ratio of 4:3, or for e-mail attachment.  
Record pictures with the same aspect ratio (3:2) as those shot with  
35mm [135] format film cameras.  
3648×2432  
Record pictures with the same aspect ratio (16:9) as wide-screen  
televisions.  
z
3584×2016  
2736×2736  
H
Record square pictures.  
The setting for the image size is shown by an icon displayed on the monitor during  
shooting and playback (A6 to 8).  
C Notes on Image Size Setting  
Can be set from the quick menu dial even in shooting modes other than A, B, Cand D(except  
for movie mode).  
The setting is also applied to other shooting modes (except for low noise night mode, and  
shooting modes E, Fand N).  
In low noise night mode, the available image size is C 2048×1536 or smaller.  
The size of JPEG images can be chosen when you create JPEG images from NRW (RAW) images  
using NRW (RAW) processing (A143) (up to a maximum of 3648×2736 pixels).  
Image size for the JPEG image can be set when NRW (RAW) + Fine, NRW (RAW) + Normal or  
NRW (RAW) + Basic is selected. However, note that I 3648×2432, z 3584×2016 and  
H 2732736 cannot be selected.  
This feature cannot be used simultaneously with certain features. See “Functions that Cannot be  
Applied Simultaneously” (A108) for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
70  
   
Changing the Frequently Used Settings for Shooting (A, B, C, DModes)  
C Number of Exposures Remaining  
The following table lists the approximate number of pictures that can be stored in the internal  
memory and on a 4 GB memory card, at each combination of Image size (A70) and Image quality  
(A68) settings. Note that the number of images that can be stored differs depending on the  
composition of the image (due to JPEG compression). In addition, this number may differ depending  
on the make of memory card, even if the capacity of the memory card is the same.  
Internal  
memory  
(79 MB)  
2
1
Print size  
(cm/in.)  
Memory card  
(4 GB)  
Image size  
Image quality  
Fine  
Normal  
16  
32  
63  
5
770  
1,540  
3,010  
230  
3648×2736  
3
M
31×23/12×9  
(default setting) Basic  
NRW (RAW)  
Fine  
20  
40  
78  
970  
1,910  
3,650  
E
D
C
B
A
J
f
I
3264×2448  
2592×1944  
2048×1536  
1600×1200  
1280×960  
1024×768  
640×480  
Normal  
Basic  
28×21/11×8  
Fine  
Normal  
Basic  
32  
62  
117  
1,520  
2,940 22×16/8.5×6.5  
5,480  
Fine  
Normal  
Basic  
50  
97  
181  
2,410  
4,640  
8,620  
17×13/7×5  
14×10/5×4  
11×8/4×3  
Fine  
Normal  
Basic  
80  
153  
266  
3,770  
7,100  
12,000  
Fine  
Normal  
Basic  
120  
220  
362  
5,740  
10,000  
17,200  
Fine  
Normal  
Basic  
181  
316  
507  
8,620  
15,000  
24,100  
9×7/3.5×2.5  
5×4/2×1.5  
31×21/12×8  
Fine  
Normal  
Basic  
362  
563  
724  
17,200  
24,100  
30,100  
Fine  
Normal  
Basic  
18  
36  
70  
870  
1,720  
3,350  
3648×2432  
Fine  
Normal  
Basic  
22  
44  
85  
1,060  
z 3584×2016  
2,110 30×17/12×6.5  
4,020  
Fine  
Normal  
Basic  
21  
42  
83  
1,030  
2,040  
3,890  
H
2736×2736  
23×23/9×9  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Changing the Frequently Used Settings for Shooting (A, B, C, DModes)  
1
2
If the number of exposures remaining is 10,000 or more, “9999” is displayed.  
The print size at an output resolution of 300 dpi.  
Print sizes are calculated by dividing the number of pixels by the printer resolution (dpi) and  
multiplying by 2.54 cm (1 in.). However, even with the same image size setting, images printed at  
higher resolutions print smaller than the size indicated, and those printed at lower resolutions print  
larger than the size indicated.  
3
The print size of NRW (RAW) images differs according to the image size of the NRW (RAW)  
processed images (A143).  
D Printing Images of Size 1:1  
Change the printer setting to “Border” when printing images with the size set to 1:1.  
The images may not be printed in 1:1 ratio depending on the printer.  
See the instruction manual of the printer or check with the authorized print dealer for further details.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changing the Frequently Used Settings for Shooting (A, B, C, DModes)  
Setting the Image Quality and the Image Size  
1
Rotate the quick menu dial to aand press  
the quick menu button.  
The quick menu is displayed.  
Rotate the mode dial (A44) to a setting other than D.  
2
Choose the type of Image quality (A68) with  
the rotary multi selector.  
Image quality  
Normal  
Items can also be chosen by rotating the command dial.  
To change the image quality only, choose the type of  
image quality, and then press the quick menu button.  
Image size  
1342  
To continue and change the image size, press the rotary  
multi selector I. The Av/Tv button can also be used to  
proceed to the next step.  
3
4
Choose the type of Image size (A70).  
Image quality  
Image size cannot be selected when NRW (RAW) is  
selected for Image quality.  
Image size  
3648×2736  
The number of exposures remaining for the selected  
Image size is displayed.  
1342  
Press the rotary multi selector Hto return to the Image  
quality setting.  
Numbers of exposures  
remaining  
After completing the settings, press the quick menu button or the k  
button.  
The monitor display reverts to shooting mode.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changing the Frequently Used Settings for Shooting (A, B, C, DModes)  
bSetting the ISO Sensitivity  
Setting the ISO sensitivity to a high level enables shooting when the light intensity is low.  
The higher the ISO sensitivity, the darker the subject that can be shot. Also, using a  
faster shutter speed for a subject of the same brightness makes it easier to reduce  
blur caused by camera vibration or subject movement.  
Setting the ISO sensitivity to a high level is effective when shooting dark subjects,  
not using the flash, shooting at the telephoto zoom position and similar  
situations, but the pictures may be slightly grainy.  
ISO sensitivity  
a Auto (default setting): The sensitivity is ISO 100 in bright places; in dark  
places the camera automatically raises the sensitivity to a maximum of ISO 800.  
BHigh ISO sensitivity auto: The ISO sensitivity is set automatically within the  
range of ISO 100 to 1600 according to the brightness of the subject.  
x ISO 100-200, y ISO 100-400 (fixed range auto):  
Choose the range in which the camera automatically adjusts ISO sensitivity. The  
camera does not raise sensitivity beyond the maximum value in the selected range.  
Set the maximum value for ISO sensitivity to control “grain” that appears in images.  
100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, Hi 1 (equivalent to ISO 6400):  
ISO sensitivity is locked at the specified value.  
Minimum shutter speed  
When the shooting mode is  
A
or  
C
and ISO sensitivity is set to Auto, High ISO  
sensitivity auto ISO 100-200 or ISO 100-400, the shutter speed at which the ISO  
,
sensitivity automatic control starts to function (1/125 to one second) is set. The default  
setting is None. If the exposure is insufficient with the shutter speed that is set here, the  
ISO sensitivity is increased automatically to obtain the correct exposure. If the exposure is  
still insufficient even after the ISO sensitivity is increased, the shutter speed slows down.  
The icon for the current setting is displayed on the monitor (A6).  
If Auto is selected and the sensitivity is automatically raised above ISO 100, the  
E icon is displayed (A34).  
When High ISO sensitivity auto is selected, the V icon is displayed. When ISO  
100-200 or ISO 100-400 is selected, the U icon and the maximum ISO  
sensitivity value are displayed.  
C Notes on ISO Sensitivity  
In D(manual) mode, ISO sensitivity is fixed at ISO 100 if Auto, High ISO sensitivity auto, ISO  
100-200 or ISO 100-400 is selected.  
When the ISO sensitivity is set to a high level, the shutter speed may be restricted. See “Functions  
This feature cannot be used simultaneously with certain features. See “Functions that Cannot be  
Applied Simultaneously” (A108) for more information.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Changing the Frequently Used Settings for Shooting (A, B, C, DModes)  
Setting the ISO Sensitivity  
1
Rotate the quick menu dial to band press  
the quick menu button.  
The quick menu is displayed.  
2
Choose the ISO sensitivity with the rotary  
multi selector.  
ISO sensitivity  
Auto  
Items can also be chosen by rotating the command dial.  
Press the rotary multi selector Iwhen the ISO  
sensitivity is set to Auto, High ISO sensitivity auto,  
ISO 100-200 or ISO 100-400 to proceed to step 3.  
The Av/Tv button can also be used to proceed to the  
next step.  
Minimum shutter speed  
If the ISO sensitivity is fixed, proceed to step 4.  
3
4
Choose the minimum shutter speed.  
ISO sensitivity  
Press the rotary multi selector Hto return to the ISO  
sensitivity setting.  
Minimum shutter speed  
After completing the settings, press the quick menu button or the k  
button.  
The monitor display reverts to shooting mode.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changing the Frequently Used Settings for Shooting (A, B, C, DModes)  
cMatching Image Colors with Colors as Seen with the  
Naked Eye (White Balance)  
See “Setting the White Balance” (A77) for more information.  
The color of light reflected from an object varies with the color of the light source. The human  
brain is able to adapt to changes in the color of the light source, with the result that white  
objects appear white whether seen in the shade, direct sunlight, or under incandescent  
lighting. Digital cameras can mimic this adjustment of the human eye by processing images  
according to the color of the light source. This is known as “white balance.”  
For natural coloration, choose a white balance setting that matches the light source before  
shooting.  
Although the default setting, Auto, can be used under most types of lighting, you can apply  
the white balance setting suited to a particular light source to achieve more accurate results.  
Available when the shooting mode is A, B, C, D, E, F, N, O(low noise  
night) or movie mode.  
a
Auto (default setting)  
The white balance is automatically adjusted to suit the lighting conditions. The best  
choice in most situations.  
c
d
e
Daylight  
The white balance is adjusted for direct sunlight.  
Incandescent  
Use under incandescent lighting.  
Fluorescent (FL1 to FL3)  
Use under most types of fluorescent lighting. Choose one of FL1 (white fluorescent),  
FL2 (daylight white/neutral fluorescent) and FL3 (daylight fluorescent).  
f
g
Cloudy  
Use when shooting under overcast skies.  
Flash  
Use with the flash.  
x
b
Choose color temp.  
Use to directly specify the color temperature (A78).  
Preset manual (1 to 3)  
A neutral-colored object is used as a reference to set the white balance under  
unusual lighting conditions. See “Preset Manual” (A79) for more information.  
The effects of the selected option can be previewed on the monitor (  
settings other than Auto, the icon for the current setting is displayed on the monitor.  
C Notes on White Balance  
At white balance settings other than Auto or Flash, set the flash to W(Off) (A32).  
This feature cannot be used simultaneously with certain features. See “Functions that Cannot be  
Applied Simultaneously” (A108) for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
76  
   
Changing the Frequently Used Settings for Shooting (A, B, C, D Modes)  
Setting the White Balance  
1
Rotate the quick menu dial to c and press  
the quick menu button.  
The quick menu is displayed.  
2
Choose the type of white balance with the  
rotary multi selector and press I.  
White balance  
Items can also be chosen by rotating the command dial.  
Auto  
When Choose color temp. is chosen, set the color  
temperature (A78).  
Fine-tune  
The Av/Tv button can also be used to proceed to the  
next step.  
3
4
Perform fine adjustment of the setting by  
pressing H, I, J or K.  
Fine-tune  
The four directions are A (amber), B (blue), G (green) and  
M (magenta), and fine adjustment can be performed in  
six levels in all directions.  
Reset  
Back  
When the l button is pressed, the fine adjustment value  
is reset to the center (coordinate 0, 0).  
Press the Av/Tv button to return to the screen in the previous step.  
After completing the settings, press the quick menu button or the k  
button.  
The monitor display reverts to shooting mode.  
C Fine Adjustment of White Balance  
The color displayed in the fine-tune screen for white balance represents the approximate color in the  
color temperature direction. When a color is set in the fine-tune screen, it may not be reproduced  
exactly in the image. For example, when the white balance is set to Incandescent, the image will not  
have a strong blue color even if fine adjustment is performed in the B (blue) direction.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Changing the Frequently Used Settings for Shooting (A, B, C, DModes)  
C Color Temperature  
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions. Color temperature  
is an objective measure of the color of a light source, defined with reference to the temperature to  
which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same wavelengths. While light  
sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5000–5500K appear white, light sources  
with a lower color temperature, such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly yellow or red. Light  
sources with a higher color temperature appear tinged with blue. The camera white balance options  
are adapted to the following color temperatures.  
Red  
Blue  
3000  
4000  
5000 6000  
8000 10000  
[K]  
1
2
3
4
567  
8
9
0
a
Sodium-vapor lamps: 2700K  
Flash: 5400K  
1
2
7
Incandescent/  
Warm-white fluorescent: 3000K  
Cloudy: 6000K  
8
9
0
a
Daylight fluorescent: 6500K  
High temp. mercury-vapor: 7200K  
Shade: 8000K  
White fluorescent: 3700K  
Cool-white fluorescent: 4200K  
Day white fluorescent: 5000K  
Direct sunlight: 5200K  
3
4
5
6
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Changing the Frequently Used Settings for Shooting (A, B, C, DModes)  
Preset Manual  
Use when you want to make pictures shot under unusual lighting conditions (such  
as lamps with reddish light) look as though they were shot in normal light.  
Use the procedure below to shoot after measuring the white balance value under  
the shooting light.  
Up to three preset values can be saved: PRE1, PRE2 and PRE3.  
1
Place a white or gray reference object under the lighting that will be  
used during shooting.  
2
Display the white balance quick menu (A76),  
choose PRE1, PRE2 or PRE3 with the rotary  
White balance  
multi selector, and press I.  
Preset manual 1  
Items can also be chosen by rotating the command dial.  
The lens extends to the zoom position for  
measurement.  
Measure  
Fine-tune  
The Av/Tv button can also be used to proceed to the  
next step.  
3
4
Frame a white or gray reference object in the  
reference object frame.  
White balance  
Preset manual 1  
Measure  
Fine-tune  
Reference object frame  
Press the kbutton to measure the white balance value.  
The shutter is released and the new white-balance preset value is set (no picture is  
recorded).  
B Note on Preset Manual  
The camera cannot measure a white balance value for when the flash fires. When shooting with  
the flash, set White balance to Auto or Flash.  
When a wide-angle converter is mounted, preset manual cannot be used. Further, the preset value  
cannot be measured.  
C Using the Previously Measured White Balance Value  
Press the quick menu button or the shutter-release button in step 3. The most recently measured  
value is set for white balance, without performing measurement again.  
C Performing Fine Adjustment for the Measured White Balance Value  
After measuring, display the screen in step 3 again and press the Ibutton to perform fine  
adjustment for white balance (step 3 of A77).  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Changing the Frequently Used Settings for Shooting (A, B, C, DModes)  
dContinuous Shooting while Changing the Shutter  
Speed, ISO Sensitivity and White Balance (Bracketing)  
Continuous shooting can be performed while changing the exposure (brightness)  
automatically with the shutter speed (Tv) or ISO sensitivity (Sv), or multiple pictures  
can be recorded while varying the white balance (WB). This is effective when  
adjusting the brightness of an image is difficult, or when multiple light sources are  
mixed together and it is difficult to decide the white balance.  
k
Off (default setting)  
Bracketing is not performed.  
Exposure bracketing (Tv)  
e
Set the number of pictures to shoot continuously, the number of exposure  
increments, and the bracketing range. When the shutter-release button is fully  
pressed, pictures are shot continuously while the shutter speed is adjusted  
automatically.  
“Tv” means “Time value.”  
r
s
Exposure bracketing (Sv)  
Set the number of pictures to shoot continuously, the number of ISO sensitivity  
increments, and the bracketing range. When the shutter-release button is pressed  
fully, pictures are shot continuously while changing the ISO sensitivity, with the  
shutter speed and aperture value fixed.  
“Sv” means “Sensitivity value.”  
White balance bracketing  
Set the number of pictures to record, the number of color temperature  
compensation increments, and the bracketing range. When the shutter-release  
button is pressed fully, one picture is shot, and the set number of pictures is recorded  
with the color temperature changed for each one.  
When bracketing is enabled, the current setting is displayed during shooting (A6).  
When Off is selected, an icon for the current setting is not displayed.  
B Notes on Bracketing  
Exposure bracketing (Tv) and Exposure bracketing (Sv) are not available in D(manual)  
mode.  
Exposure bracketing (Tv) is not available in B(Shutter-priority auto) mode.  
When exposure compensation (A43) and Exposure bracketing (Tv) are set simultaneously, the  
combined exposure compensation is applied.  
In White balance bracketing, only compensation for the color temperature (horizontal direction  
from A (amber) to B (blue)) is performed. Compensation in the vertical direction from G (green) to  
M (magenta) is not performed.  
This feature cannot be used simultaneously with certain features. See “Functions that Cannot be  
Applied Simultaneously” (A108) for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
80  
   
Changing the Frequently Used Settings for Shooting (A, B, C, D Modes)  
Setting the Bracketing  
1
Rotate the quick menu dial to d and press  
the quick menu button.  
The quick menu is displayed.  
2
Choose the type of bracketing with the rotary  
multi selector and press I.  
Auto bracketing  
Items can also be chosen by rotating the command dial.  
Number of shots  
Increment  
Range  
The Av/Tv button can also be used to proceed to the  
next step.  
3
4
Choose the number of pictures to shoot and  
press I.  
Auto bracketing  
Number of shots  
3 or 5 pictures can be chosen.  
Increment  
Range  
Reset  
Choose the compensation step and press I.  
Auto bracketing  
Number of shots  
Increment  
For Exposure bracketing (Tv) or Exposure  
bracketing (Sv), choose 0.3, 0.7 or 1.  
For White balance bracketing, choose 1, 2 or 3.  
Range  
Reset  
5
Choose the bracketing range and press the  
quick menu button or the k button.  
Auto bracketing  
Number of shots  
Increment  
The monitor display reverts to shooting mode.  
Range  
When the l button is pressed, the settings are reset and  
the monitor returns to step 3.  
Reset  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Checking the Picture Brightness Distribution (  
A,  
B,  
C, DModes)  
Tone level information” is displayed automatically each time the shutter is released so  
that you can check the brightness distribution of the shot picture and the shooting  
information.  
You can check for loss of contrast detail in highlights and shadows from the histogram  
that is displayed, or the blinking display for each tone level. These provide guidelines  
when adjusting the picture brightness with functions such as exposure compensation.  
Tone level information can be used when A, B, C, D, E, For Nis chosen  
for shooting mode. Choose the shooting mode with the mode dial (A44).  
1
Rotate the quick menu dial to eand press  
the quick menu button to turn on the quick  
menu dial mark.  
The tone level information icon blinks on the monitor.  
1/250  
F5.6  
1342  
2
3
Frame the subject and shoot.  
The tone level information of the shot picture is displayed.  
Histogram  
Tone level  
Check the brightness distribution and  
shooting information.  
Bright  
Dark  
Choose the tone level to check with Hor Ion  
the rotary multi selector. The area of the picture  
that corresponds to the chosen tone level blinks.  
more information.  
1/250 F5.6  
Shooting data  
Screen” (A83) for more information.  
4
After completing your check, press the shutter-release button halfway.  
The monitor display reverts to shooting mode.  
To turn off the automatic display function of the tone level information, press the quick  
menu button to turn off the quick menu dial mark, or rotate the quick menu dial to a  
setting other than e.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Checking the Picture Brightness Distribution (A, B, C, DModes)  
C Histogram and Shooting Information Displays of Tone Level Information  
The histogram is a graph that shows the brightness distribution in the picture. The horizontal axis  
shows the number of pixels, and the vertical axis corresponds to pixel brightness.  
The shooting information displayed includes the shooting mode used (A, B, Cor D), shutter  
speed, aperture value, image quality, image size, ISO sensitivity, white balance, exposure  
compensation, and COOLPIX picture control.  
C Displaying Tone Level Information in Playback Mode  
The tone level information can also be displayed (A14) by pressing the xbutton in full-frame  
playback mode.  
Operations in the Tone Level Information Screen  
The following operations can be performed for the tone level information.  
To  
Use  
Description  
A
Rotate the rotary multi selector or press H  
or I.  
Choose the tone level  
Press Jor Kto choose a picture to display. 12  
Choose pictures  
Rotate the command dial.  
Enlarge the view of the picture currently  
displayed on the monitor, up to about 10×.  
Press the kbutton to return to the full-  
frame playback mode.  
Playback zoom  
Display menu  
g(i)  
Display the playback menu.  
d
Switch to the shooting  
mode  
Press the shutter-release button to enter  
the shooting mode.  
When the quick menu button is pressed or  
the quick menu dial is rotated to a setting  
other than ewhile shooting, the  
Exit the tone level  
information  
automatic display function turns off.  
Press the xbutton during playback to  
switch the information displayed on the  
monitor.  
x
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Selecting the Focus Area (A, B, C, DModes)  
In shooting modes A, B, C, D, E, F, Nand O(low noise night), you can  
change how the camera selects the focus area for autofocus.  
Face priority  
a
The camera automatically detects and focuses on a  
face (see “Shooting with Face Priority” (A86) for more  
information). If the camera detects multiple faces, the  
camera focuses on the face closest to the camera.  
When subjects other than people are photographed,  
or a subject with which no face can be detected is  
framed, AF area mode is set to Auto. The camera  
automatically selects one or more of the nine focus  
areas containing the subject closest to the camera.  
1/250  
F5.6  
1342  
Focus area  
When the monitor is turned off, the focus area is fixed  
to the Center (normal).  
Auto (default setting)  
w
The camera automatically selects one or more of the  
nine focus areas containing the subject closest to the  
camera.  
Press the shutter-release button halfway to activate  
the focus area.  
When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway,  
the focus area selected by the camera is displayed on  
the monitor (up to nine areas).  
1/250  
F5.6  
1342  
Focus areas  
When the monitor is turned off, the focus area is  
fixed to the Center (normal).  
Manual  
x
Choose manually the focus position from 99 areas in  
the screen. This option is suited to situations in which  
the intended subject is relatively still and not  
positioned in the center of the frame.  
Rotate the rotary multi selector or press H, I, Jor K  
to select one of 99 focus areas displayed on the  
monitor’s focus-area selection screen, and shoot.  
To end focus-area selection and adjust the flash mode,  
focus mode and self-timer settings, press the k  
button. To return to the focus-area selection screen,  
press the kbutton again.  
Focus area  
Selectable areas  
At an Image size setting (A70) of H 2732736, 81 focus areas are available.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Selecting the Focus Area (A, B, C, DModes)  
Center (wide), Center (normal), Center (spot)  
y
The camera focuses on the subject in the center of the  
frame. The center focus area is displayed all the time.  
Three sizes are available for the focus area.  
1/250  
F5.6  
1342  
Focus area  
Subject tracking  
s
Subject tracking begins once you select a subject to be  
focused on, and the focus area will move and follow  
Using AF Area Mode  
1
Press G (AF area mode) on the rotary multi  
selector.  
The AF area mode menu is displayed.  
2
Rotate the rotary multi selector to choose the  
desired focus area and press the kbutton.  
When selecting y (center), press Hor Ito select  
wide, normal or spot.  
If the kbutton is not pressed within a few seconds, the  
selection is set and the setting menu disappears.  
Face priority  
B Notes on AF Area Mode  
When the digital zoom is in effect, the camera focuses on the subject in the center focus area  
regardless of the applied AF area mode option.  
In some rare cases of shooting subjects for which autofocus does not perform as expected (A29),  
the subject may not be in focus.  
This feature cannot be used simultaneously with certain features. See “Functions that Cannot be  
Applied Simultaneously” (A108) for more information.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Selecting the Focus Area (A, B, C, DModes)  
Shooting with Face Priority  
The camera automatically detects and focuses on a face.  
The face priority function is enabled for the following situations.  
Face priority is selected for AF area mode (A84)  
When Scene auto selector (A46), Portrait (A48) or Night portrait (A49)  
is selected in scene mode  
When a (Smile timer) is selected (A36)  
1
Frame the picture.  
When the camera detects a face, the focus area  
containing the face is displayed with a double yellow  
border.  
1/250  
F5.6  
1342  
When the camera detects more than one face, depending upon the shooting mode,  
the operation varies as follows.  
Faces framed by a double  
border  
Number of faces to be  
recognized  
Shooting mode  
A, B, C, D, E, F, N  
modes (Face priority)  
The face closest to the camera  
* The other faces are framed by Up to 12  
a single border.  
Scene auto selector,  
Portrait or Night portrait  
scene modes  
The face closest to the center  
of the frame  
* The other faces are framed by  
a (Smile timer)  
Up to 3  
a single border.  
2
Press the shutter-release button halfway.  
The camera focuses on the face framed by the double  
border. The double border lights in green and the focus  
is locked.  
When the camera is unable to focus on a face, the  
double border blinks. Press the shutter-release button  
halfway again and focus.  
1/250  
F5.6  
1342  
Press the shutter-release button all the way down to shoot.  
If the shutter-release button is fully pressed down while a (Smile timer) is set, the  
shutter releases automatically when the camera detects a smiling face (A36).  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Selecting the Focus Area (A, B, C, DModes)  
B Notes on Face Priority  
When Face priority is selected for AF area mode, the setting automatically switches to Auto if no  
face is detected when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.  
If no face is recognized when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway in the Portrait or Night  
portrait scene mode, the camera focuses on the subject in the center focus area.  
The camera may not detect faces in the following situations:  
-
-
When faces are partially hidden by sunglasses or other obstructions  
When faces take up too much or too little of the frame  
If the camera detects more than one face, the face that it focuses on depends on the shooting  
conditions, such as whether or not the subject is facing the camera.  
In some rare cases of shooting subjects for which autofocus does not perform as expected (A29),  
the subject may not be in focus despite the fact that the double border lights in green. If you  
cannot focus, change the AF area mode setting to Manual, Center (wide), Center (normal) or  
Center (spot), or try shooting with focus lock (A29) by switching the shooting mode to a mode  
such as auto mode and refocusing on another subject at the same distance.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Selecting the Focus Area (A, B, C, DModes)  
Focusing on Moving Subjects for Shooting (Subject Tracking)  
To focus on moving subjects, set the autofocus area setting to s(subject tracking)  
in shooting mode A, B, C, D, E, F, Nor O(low noise night). Subject tracking  
begins once you select a subject to be focused on, and the focus area will move and  
follow the subject.  
1
Press G (AF area mode) on the rotary multi  
selector.  
The AF area mode menu is displayed.  
2
Rotate the rotary multi selector to choose s  
(subject tracking) and press the kbutton.  
The camera enters subject tracking, and a white border  
is displayed in the center of the frame.  
If the kbutton is not pressed within a few seconds, the  
selection is set and the setting menu disappears.  
Subject tracking  
Start  
3
Select a subject.  
Frame the subject in the center of the border, and press  
the kbutton.  
-
-
The subject is registered.  
When the camera is unable to focus on the subject,  
the border lights in red. Change the composition and  
try again.  
Once the subject is registered, it is framed by a yellow  
focus area display, and subject tracking begins.  
To change subjects, press the kbutton to cancel the  
currently selected subject, then select a new subject.  
If the camera loses sight of the subject, the focus area  
display disappears; register the subject again.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Selecting the Focus Area (A, B, C, D Modes)  
4
Press the shutter-release button to take the  
picture.  
If the camera focuses on the focus area when the  
shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the focus area  
display turns green and the focus is locked.  
1/250  
F5.6  
If the camera is unable to focus, the focus area display  
will blink. Press the shutter-release button halfway again  
to focus.  
If the shutter-release button is pressed halfway while the focus area is not displayed,  
the camera focuses at the center of the frame.  
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to take the picture.  
B Subject Tracking  
The digital zoom is not available.  
Set the zoom position, flash mode, focus mode, or menu before registering a subject. If any of these  
are changed after a subject is registered, the subject will be canceled.  
During certain conditions, such as when the subject is moving quickly, when there is a large  
amount of camera shake, or when there are multiple subjects that look alike, the camera may not  
be able to register or track a subject, or the camera may track a different subject. Additionally, the  
subject may not be tracked properly depending on factors such as the subject’s size and  
brightness.  
In some rare cases of shooting subjects for which autofocus does not perform as expected (A29),  
the subject may not be in focus despite the fact that the focus area lights in green. If you cannot  
focus, change the AF area mode setting to Manual, Center (wide), Center (normal) or Center  
(spot), or try shooting with focus lock (A29) by switching the shooting mode to a mode such as  
auto mode and refocusing on another subject at the same distance.  
In subject tracking, the monitor is not turned off even when the x button is pressed (A14).  
This feature cannot be used simultaneously with certain features. See “Functions that Cannot be  
Applied Simultaneously” (A108) for more information.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shooting Options: Shooting Menu (A, B, C, DModes)  
While shooting in A, B, C, D, E, Fand N(A112), the shooting menu  
contains the following options.  
Picture Control  
Change the settings for image recording according to the shooting scene or your  
preferences.  
Custom Picture Control  
Save adjusted COOLPIX Picture Controls as custom settings to be used for picture editing.  
Metering  
Choose how the camera meters exposure.  
Continuous  
Change the settings for continuous shooting and BSS (Best Shot Selector).  
Autofocus mode  
Choose how the camera focuses.  
Flash exp. comp.  
Adjust the flash level.  
Noise reduction filter  
Set the strength of the noise reduction function that is normally performed when recording  
a picture.  
Long exposure NR  
Reduce noise in pictures shot at slow shutter speeds.  
Distortion control  
Choose whether to correct the peripheral distortion that occurs due to the intrinsic  
characteristics of lenses.  
Wide-angle converter  
Adjust the settings for the converter lenses (available separately).  
Flash control  
Control the built-in flash.  
Active D-Lighting  
Prevent loss of contrast details in highlights and shadows when shooting images.  
Zoom memory  
Set the focal length that is selected when the zoom control is operated while pressing the  
wbutton.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Shooting Options: Shooting Menu (A, B, C, DModes)  
Displaying the Shooting Menu  
Choose A(Programmed auto), B(Shutter-priority auto), C(Aperture-priority auto),  
D(Manual), or E, For N(User settings) by rotating the mode dial.  
Press the dbutton to display the shooting menu and use the rotary multi  
selector to change to A, B, Cor Dtab (A14).  
Shooting menu  
Picture Control  
Custom Picture Control  
Metering  
Continuous  
Autofocus mode  
Flash exp. comp.  
Noise reduction filter  
Use the rotary multi selector to select items and set functions on menus (A12).  
Press the dbutton to exit the shooting menu.  
B Functions that Cannot be Applied Simultaneously  
Some functions cannot be enabled in conjunction with others (A108).  
C Navigating the Camera Menu  
The command dial can also be used in place of the rotary multi selector.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Shooting Options: Shooting Menu (A, B, C, DModes)  
Picture Control (COOLPIX Picture Control)  
Set to A, B, Cor DMdMA, B, C, D(shooting menu) (A91) MPicture Control  
Change the settings for image recording according to the shooting scene or your  
preferences. Sharpness, contrast and saturation can be adjusted in detail.  
b
Standard (default setting)  
Standard processing for balanced results. Recommended for most situations.  
c
Neutral  
Minimal processing for natural results. Choose for photographs that will later be  
extensively processed or retouched.  
d
Vivid  
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect. Choose for photographs that  
emphasize primary colors, such as blue, red, and green.  
e
f
g
Monochrome  
Take monochrome photographs in black-and-white or sepia.  
*
Custom 1  
Change to the setting for Custom 1 in COOLPIX Custom Picture Control.  
*
Custom 2  
Change to the setting for Custom 2 in COOLPIX Custom Picture Control.  
*
Only displayed when the setting customized in Custom Picture Control (A96) has been  
registered.  
The current COOLPIX Picture Control is shown in the shooting information display  
(nothing is displayed when Standard is selected) (A6).  
B COOLPIX Picture Control  
The COOLPIX Picture Control feature of the COOLPIX P7000 cannot be used with other makes of  
cameras, Capture NX, Capture NX 2 and ViewNX 2 Picture Control feature.  
This feature cannot be used simultaneously with certain features. See “Functions that Cannot be  
Applied Simultaneously” (A108) for more information.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Shooting Options: Shooting Menu (A, B, C, D Modes)  
Customizing Existing COOLPIX Picture Controls: Quick Adjust and  
Manual Adjust  
COOLPIX Picture Control can be customized using Quick adjust, which allows for  
balanced adjustment of sharpness, contrast, saturation and other image editing  
components, or manual adjust, which allows for detailed adjusting of the  
components individually.  
1
Use the rotary multi selector to choose  
COOLPIX Picture Control and press the k  
button.  
Picture Control  
Standard  
Neutral  
Vivid  
Monochrome  
View grid  
2
Press H or I to highlight the desired setting  
(A94) and press J or K to choose a value.  
Standard  
Quick adjust  
Image sharpening  
Contrast  
Saturation  
Press the k button to set the value.  
When COOLPIX Picture Controls are modified from the  
default settings, an asterisk (*) is displayed after the  
options in the Picture Control Setting menu.  
Reset  
Back  
To change the values to the default setting, select  
Reset and press the k button.  
C View Grid of COOLPIX Picture Control  
When the zoom control is rotated in the g (i) direction while the  
screen in step 1 of the above procedure is displayed, the contrast and  
saturation are displayed using a grid. The vertical axis indicates the  
contrast level, and the horizontal axis indicates the saturation. Rotate  
the zoom control in the g (i) direction again to return to the  
previous screen.  
The COOLPIX Picture Control grid displays the current and default  
settings in relation to the other COOLPIX Picture Controls.  
Standard  
Back  
Rotate the rotary multi selector to change to other COOLPIX Picture Controls.  
Press the k button to display the COOLPIX Picture Control Setting screen (step 2 above).  
For Monochrome, the grid is displayed for contrast only.  
The grid is also displayed when adjusting Contrast or Saturation with manual adjustment.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Shooting Options: Shooting Menu (A, B, C, DModes)  
1
Quick adjust  
Adjust the sharpness, contrast and saturation levels automatically. Five levels of  
adjustment are available from -2 to +2.  
Choose from options between -2 and +2 to reduce or emphasize the effect of the  
selected COOLPIX Picture Control.  
The default setting is 0.  
Image sharpening  
Choose how much outlines are sharpened during shooting. Choose A (auto) to  
adjust sharpening automatically, or choose from seven levels of adjustment between  
0 (no sharpening) and 6. The higher the number, the sharper the picture, and the  
lower the number, the softer the picture.  
The default setting is 3 for Standard or Monochrome, 2 for Neutral and 4 for  
Vivid.  
Contrast  
Control the contrast. Choose A (auto) to adjust the contrast automatically according  
to the type of scene, or choose from seven levels of adjustment between -3 and +3.  
– makes it into an image with a softer appearance, and + gives it a harder  
appearance. Choose lower values to prevent highlights in portrait subjects from  
being “washed out” in direct sunlight, higher values to preserve detail in misty  
landscapes and other low-contrast subjects.  
The default setting is 0.  
2
Saturation  
Control the vividness of colors. Choose A (auto) to adjust saturation automatically  
according to the type of scene, or seven levels of adjustment can be done by  
choosing from values between -3 and +3.  
Setting to the – side reduces the vividness, and setting to the + side increases the  
vividness.  
The default setting is 0.  
3
Filter effects  
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs. Choose from Off  
(the default setting), Y (yellow), O (orange), R (red), and G (green).  
Y, O, R:  
Enhance contrast. Can be used to tone down the brightness of the sky in landscape  
photographs. The contrast is strengthened in the order Y O R.  
G:  
Softens skin tones. Suitable for portraits.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Shooting Options: Shooting Menu (A, B, C, DModes)  
3
Toning  
Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs from B&W (black-and-white, the  
default setting), Sepia, and Cyanotype (blue-tinted monochrome).  
Pressing Ion the rotary multi selector when Sepia or Cyanotype is selected  
enables you to choose from seven levels of saturation. Press Jor Kto adjust the  
saturation.  
1
Quick adjust is not available in Neutral, Monochrome, Custom 1 and Custom 2.  
The values set manually are disabled if quick adjust is used after manual setting.  
Not displayed for Monochrome.  
2
3
Only displayed for Monochrome.  
B Note on Image Sharpening  
The effects of Image sharpening cannot be previewed on the monitor during shooting. Check the  
results in playback mode.  
B Note on Contrast  
When Active D-Lighting (A106) is set to settings other than Off, the J mark is displayed for  
Contrast and Contrast cannot be adjusted.  
B Contrast, Saturation and A (Auto)  
Results for contrast and saturation vary with the exposure, and the position and size of the subject  
in the frame.  
The setting for the COOLPIX Picture Control which has A (auto) selected for either Contrast or  
Saturation is displayed in green in the COOLPIX Picture Control grid.  
C Options that Can Be Adjusted in Custom 1 and Custom 2  
The option of the original COOLPIX Picture Control can be adjusted if Custom 1 or Custom 2 is  
selected.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Shooting Options: Shooting Menu (A, B, C, D Modes)  
Custom Picture Control (COOLPIX Custom Picture Control)  
Set to  
A
,
B,  
C
or D M d M A  
,
B,  
C,  
D
(shooting menu) (  
91)  
M
Custom Picture Control  
Customized picture editing options can be created and saved as Custom Picture  
Controls.  
Creating COOLPIX Custom Picture Controls  
1
2
3
Use the rotary multi selector to choose Edit  
and save and press the k button.  
Custom Picture Control  
Edit and save  
Delete  
Choose the original COOLPIX Picture Control  
to be edited, and press the k button.  
Custom Picture Control  
Standard  
Neutral  
Vivid  
Monochrome  
View grid  
Press H or I to highlight the desired setting  
and press J or K to choose a value.  
Standard  
Quick adjust  
Image sharpening  
Contrast  
The options are the same as those for adjusting the  
COOLPIX Picture Control.  
Saturation  
Press the k button to display the Save as screen.  
Reset  
Back  
To change the values to the default setting, select  
Reset and press the k button.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Shooting Options: Shooting Menu (A, B, C, DModes)  
4
Choose the registration destination and press  
the kbutton.  
Save as  
Custom 1  
Custom 2  
The COOLPIX Custom Picture Control is registered.  
Custom 1 or Custom 2 can be selected from the  
Picture Control and Custom Picture Control  
selection screen after registration.  
Deleting COOLPIX Custom Picture Controls  
1
2
3
Use the rotary multi selector to choose Delete  
and press the kbutton.  
Custom Picture Control  
Edit and save  
Delete  
Choose a COOLPIX Custom Picture Control to  
delete, and press the kbutton.  
Delete  
Custom 1  
Custom 2  
Choose Yes and press the kbutton.  
Delete  
Delete Custom 1?  
The registration is deleted.  
To cancel deletion, choose No.  
Yes  
No  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shooting Options: Shooting Menu (A, B, C, DModes)  
Metering  
Set to A, B, Cor DMdMA, B, C, D(shooting menu) (A91) MMetering  
The process of measuring the brightness of the subject to determine the exposure  
is known as “metering.”  
Use this option to choose how the camera meters exposure.  
G
Matrix (default setting)  
The camera meters a wide range on the screen.  
The camera sets the exposure for the entire frame. Recommended in most situations.  
q
Center-weighted  
The camera meters the entire frame but assigns greatest weight to the subject in the  
center of the frame. The classic meter for portraits; it preserves background details  
while letting lighting conditions at the center of the frame determine exposure. Can  
be used with focus lock (A29) to meter off-center subjects.  
r
s
Spot  
The camera meters the area shown by the circle in the center of the frame. This can  
be used when the subject metering target is lighter or darker than the background.  
Ensure that the subject is within the area shown by the circle when shooting. Can be  
used with focus lock (A29) to meter off-center subjects.  
Spot AF area  
The camera meters the selected focus area to determine the exposure. Available only  
when a setting other than Center (wide), Center (normal) or Center (spot) is  
selected for AF area mode (A84).  
B Notes on Metering  
When the digital zoom is in effect, at magnifications of 1.2× to 1.8×, Metering is set to Center-  
weighted, and at magnifications of 2.0× to 4.0×, it is set to Spot. Note that when the digital zoom  
is in effect, the metered area is not shown on the monitor.  
This feature cannot be used simultaneously with certain features. See “Functions that Cannot be  
Applied Simultaneously” (A108) for more information.  
C Metering in Low Noise Night Mode  
Metering can be set even in low noise night mode (A59). This setting is stored in the camera’s  
memory independently and is not linked to Metering in shooting modes A, B, Cand D.  
D Metering Area  
The active metering area is displayed when Center-weighted or Spot is selected for Metering  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Shooting Options: Shooting Menu (A, B, C, DModes)  
Continuous  
Set to A, B, Cor DMdMA, B, C, D(shooting menu) (A91) MContinuous  
Change the settings for continuous shooting and BSS (Best Shot Selector).  
U
Single (default setting)  
One image is shot each time the shutter-release button is pressed.  
V
Continuous  
While the shutter-release button is fully held down, up to 45 pictures are shot at a rate  
of about 1.3 frames per second (fps) when Image quality is set to Normal and Imagesize  
is set to M 3648×2736.  
D
Y
BSS (Best Shot Selector)  
BSS is recommended for shooting under low lighting without the flash, with the camera  
zoomed in, or in other situations in which camera shake is likely to blur pictures.  
The camera takes up to ten images while the shutter-release button is fully held down. The  
sharpest image (image with the most details) in the series is automatically selected and saved.  
Continuous flash  
While the shutter-release button is fully held down, continuous shooting is performed  
using the built-in flash (approximately 3 frames continuously at a rate of about 1.2  
frames per second when Image quality is set to Normal and Image size is set to  
M 3648×2736).  
The camera charges the built-in flash once continuous shooting ends. No shooting can  
be performed until the charging ends. Because the ISO sensitivity is raised during  
shooting, pictures may be affected by noise.  
W
X
Multi-shot 16  
Each time the shutter-release button is fully pressed, the camera  
shoots 16 pictures at a rate of about 30 frames per second and  
arranges them in a single picture.  
The Image quality for recording is fixed to Normal and the  
Image size is fixed to D (2560×1920 pixels).  
The digital zoom is not available.  
Intvl timer shooting  
The camera shoots still pictures automatically at the specified interval (A100).  
The continuous mode setting is displayed on the monitor during shooting (A6).  
Nothing is displayed for Single.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Shooting Options: Shooting Menu (A, B, C, D Modes)  
B Notes on Continuous Shooting  
Focus, exposure and white balance are fixed at the values for the first picture in each series.  
The frame rate may become slower depending on the image quality, image size, memory card type  
or shooting conditions.  
When ISO sensitivity (A74) is set to 3200 or Hi 1, the frame rate becomes slower.  
This feature cannot be used simultaneously with certain features. See “Functions that Cannot be  
Applied Simultaneously” (A108) for more information.  
For details about using the built-in flash and the Speedlight (external flash unit), see “Functions that  
Do not raise or lower the built-in flash during continuous shooting. Shooting stops if the built-in  
flash is raised or lowered.  
B Note on Best Shot Selector  
BSS is suited for shooting stationary subjects. BSS may not produce the desired results if the subject  
moves or the composition changes.  
B Note on Continuous Flash  
The continuous flash cannot be used when the built-in flash is lowered. Raise the built-in flash when  
using the continuous flash to shoot.  
B Note on Multi-shot 16  
Smear (A198) visible in the monitor when shooting with Multi-shot 16 enabled will be recorded  
with images. Avoiding bright objects such as the sun, reflections of the sun, and electric lights when  
shooting with Multi-shot 16 enabled is recommended.  
C Continuous Shooting in Low Noise Night Mode  
Continuous can be set to Single or Continuous even in low noise night mode (A59). This setting  
is stored in the camera’s memory independently and is not linked to Continuous in shooting modes  
A, B, C and D.  
Interval Timer Shooting  
Pictures are shot automatically at the specified intervals.  
Choose from 30 s, 1 min, 5 min, or 10 min.  
1
Display the shooting menu (A91), use the  
rotary multi selector to select X Intvl timer  
shooting for the Continuous setting, and  
then press the k button.  
Continuous  
Single  
Continuous  
BSS  
Continuous ash  
Multi-shot 16  
Intvl timer shooting  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Shooting Options: Shooting Menu (A, B, C, DModes)  
2
Choose the interval between each shot and  
press the kbutton.  
Intvl timer shooting  
30 s  
1 min  
5 min  
10 min  
The maximum amount of frames that can be taken  
during interval timer shooting differs according to the  
interval taken between each shot.  
- 30 s: 600 images  
- 1 min: 300 images  
- 5 min: 60 images  
- 10 min: 30 images  
3
4
Press the dbutton.  
The camera returns to shooting mode.  
Press the shutter-release button all the way  
down to shoot the first picture and start  
interval timer shooting.  
The monitor is turned off and the power-on lamp blinks  
between shots.  
1/250  
F5.6  
1342  
The monitor reactivates automatically immediately  
before the next picture is shot.  
5
Press the shutter-release button all the way down again to finish  
shooting.  
Shooting finishes automatically if the internal memory or memory card becomes full,  
or when the number of shot frames reaches the upper limit.  
B Notes on Interval Timer Shooting  
To prevent the camera from turning off unexpectedly during shooting, use a fully charged battery.  
To power the camera continuously for extended periods, use the AC Adapter EH-5a and the Power  
Connector EP-5A (available separately). Do not, under any circumstances, use an AC Adapter other  
than the EH-5a or a Power Connector other than the EP-5A. Failure to observe this precaution could  
result in overheating or damage to the camera.  
Do not rotate the mode dial to a different setting while performing interval timer shooting.  
D More Information  
See “File and Folder Names” (A203) for more information.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shooting Options: Shooting Menu (A, B, C, DModes)  
Autofocus Mode  
Set to A, B, Cor DMdMA, B, C, D(shooting menu) (A91) MAutofocus mode  
Choose how the camera focuses.  
A
Single AF (default setting)  
The camera focuses only when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.  
B
Full-time AF  
The camera focuses continuously until the shutter-release button is pressed down  
halfway. Use with moving subjects. A sound will be heard while the camera focuses.  
C Note on Autofocus Mode  
This feature cannot be used simultaneously with certain features. See “Functions that Cannot be  
Applied Simultaneously” (A108) for more information.  
Flash Exp. Comp.  
Set to A, B, Cor DMdMA, B, C, D(shooting menu) (A91) MFlash exp. comp.  
Flash compensation is used to adjust the flash output by 2.0 EV in increments of  
1/3 EV, changing the brightness of the main subject relative to the background.  
-0.3 to -2.0  
The flash output is reduced from –0.3 to –2.0 EV, in increments of 1/3 EV, to prevent  
unwanted highlights or reflections.  
0.0 (default setting)  
The flash output is not adjusted.  
+0.3 to +2.0  
The flash output is increased from +0.3 to +2.0 EV, in increments of 1/3 EV, to make  
the main subject of the frame appear brighter.  
At settings other than 0.0, the icon for the current setting is displayed on the  
monitor (A6).  
C Flash Exp. Comp. in Low Noise Night Mode  
Flash exp. comp. can be set even in low noise night mode (A59). This setting is stored in the  
camera’s memory independently and is not linked to Flash exp. comp. in shooting modes A, B, C  
and D.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Shooting Options: Shooting Menu (A, B, C, DModes)  
Noise Reduction Filter  
Set to  
A
,
B,  
C
or DMdMA  
,
B,  
C,  
D
(shooting menu) (A91)  
M
Noise reduction filter  
Set the strength of the noise reduction function that is normally performed when  
recording the picture.  
For noise at slow shutter speeds, set with Long exposure NR (A103).  
M
Normal (default setting)  
Perform noise reduction at the standard strength.  
l
Low  
Perform noise reduction at a level lower than the standard strength.  
The setting for the noise reduction filter is shown by an icon displayed on the  
monitor during shooting (A6). Nothing is displayed for Normal.  
Long Exposure NR  
Set to A, B, Cor DMdMA, B, C, D(shooting menu) (A91) MLong exposure NR  
At slow shutter speeds, pictures may be affected by “noise” in the form of randomly-  
spaced, brightly-colored dots concentrated in dark parts of the image. Reduce  
noise at slow shutter speeds. Enabling long exposure NR increases the time needed  
to record pictures after they are shot.  
Auto (default setting)  
a
Noise reduction is performed at slow shutter speeds that are likely to result in  
pictures affected by noise.  
On  
m
Noise reduction is applied to pictures shot at shutter speeds of 1/4 second or slower.  
Switching this to On is recommended when shooting at slow shutter speeds.  
When long exposure NR is performed, the j icon is displayed on the monitor  
during shooting (A6).  
C Note on Long Exposure NR  
This feature cannot be used simultaneously with certain features. See “Functions that Cannot be  
Applied Simultaneously” (A108) for more information.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Shooting Options: Shooting Menu (A, B, C, D Modes)  
Distortion Control  
Set to A, B, C or D M d M A, B, C, D (shooting menu) (A91) M Distortion control  
Choose whether to correct the peripheral distortion that occurs due to the intrinsic  
characteristics of lenses. Enabling distortion control reduces the size of the frame,  
as compared to when distortion control is not enabled.  
On  
Q
Distortion is corrected.  
Off (default setting)  
No distortion correction is performed.  
k
When distortion control is enabled, the current setting is displayed during shooting  
(A6). When Off is selected, an icon for the current setting is not displayed.  
C Note on Distortion Control  
This feature cannot be used simultaneously with certain features. See “Functions that Cannot be  
Applied Simultaneously” (A108) for more information.  
Wide-angle Converter  
Set to  
A
,
B,  
C
or D M d M A  
,
B,  
C
,
D
(shooting menu) (A91)  
M
Wide-angle converter  
Set when the Wide-angle Converter WC-E75A (0.75×) (available separately from  
Nikon) is mounted.  
The Adapter Ring UR-E22 (available separately from Nikon) is also required for  
mounting.  
X
On  
Set when using the Wide-angle Converter WC-E75A. The angle of view when the  
WC-E75A is mounted is equivalent to about 21 mm in 35mm [135] format (when  
Distortion control is set to Off). The zoom lens is fixed to the wide-angle end.  
The digital zoom is not available.  
k
None (default setting)  
Use when no converter lens is attached (be sure to remove the lens adapter ring and  
attach the lens ring).  
The setting for the wide-angle converter is shown by an icon displayed on the  
monitor during shooting (A6). Nothing is displayed when the setting is None.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Shooting Options: Shooting Menu (A, B, C, DModes)  
B Notes on the Wide-angle Converter for Shooting  
Set Wide-angle converter to On before shooting. Set Wide-angle converter to None when no  
converter lens is attached.  
The built-in flash is changed to W(Off) when Wide-angle converter is set to On. Use flash units  
(A202) (available separately from Nikon) to shoot with the flash.  
Using the flash units (available separately from Nikon) may darken the peripheral area of the  
picture. Check the picture using the monitor after shooting. A wide panel is recommended when  
shooting with the Speedlight SB-600 or SB-900.  
AF Assist illuminator cannot be used when Wide-angle converter is set to On.  
This feature cannot be used simultaneously with certain features. See “Functions that Cannot be  
Applied Simultaneously” (A108) for more information.  
C Installing and Removing the Lens Ring  
Before attaching the wide-angle converter,  
remove the lens ring. Before installing or  
removing the lens ring, be sure to turn off  
the camera. While pressing the lens ring  
release button, rotate the lens ring  
clockwise and remove it.  
To attach the lens ring to the camera, align  
the lens ring mounting index (white dot)  
with the lens ring release button, and then  
rotate the lens ring counterclockwise.  
Lens ring release button  
When not using the wide-angle converter, be sure to attach the lens ring onto the camera.  
For more information on attaching the wide-angle converter, see the user’s manual provided with  
the wide-angle converter.  
Flash Control  
Set to A, B, Cor DMdMA, B, C, D(shooting menu) (A91) MFlash control  
You can set the built-in flash to off even when you are not using a Speedlight  
(external flash unit) (A202) mounted on the camera’s accessory shoe.  
a
Auto (default setting)  
When a flash unit is mounted, the flash unit fires. When a flash unit is not used, the  
built-in flash fires.  
k
Built-in off  
The built-in flash is disabled.  
B Note on Flash Control  
This feature cannot be used simultaneously with certain features. See “Functions that Cannot be  
Applied Simultaneously” (A108) for more information.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Shooting Options: Shooting Menu (A, B, C, DModes)  
Active D-Lighting  
Set to A, B, Cor DMdMA, B, C, D(shooting menu) (A91) MActive D-Lighting  
“Active D-Lighting” preserves details in highlights and shadows, creating  
photographs with natural contrast. The image taken reproduces the contrast effect  
that is seen with the naked eye. This is particularly effective for shooting scenes with  
high contrast, such as brightly lit outdoor scenery from a dark room or shaded  
subjects at a sunny seaside.  
a High, b Normal, c Low  
Set the level of the Active D-Lighting effect that is applied during shooting.  
k
Off (default setting)  
Active D-Lighting is not applied.  
When Active D-Lighting is enabled, the current setting is displayed during shooting  
(A6). When Off is selected, an icon for the current setting is not displayed.  
B Active D-Lighting  
Additional time is required to record images when shooting using Active D-Lighting.  
The exposure is reduced in comparison to shooting with Active D-Lighting set to Off. To ensure  
that the gradation is appropriate, adjustments of the highlighted areas, shadow areas and mid-  
tones are made before recording.  
This feature cannot be used simultaneously with certain features. See “Functions that Cannot be  
Applied Simultaneously” (A108) for more information.  
B Active D-Lighting Versus D-Lighting  
The Active D-Lighting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure before shooting to optimize  
the dynamic range. The D-Lighting (A136) option in the playback menu optimizes dynamic range  
in images after shooting.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Shooting Options: Shooting Menu (A, B, C, DModes)  
Zoom Memory  
Set to A, B, Cor DMdMA, B, C, D(shooting menu) (A91) MZoom memory  
When the zoom control is operated while pressing the wbutton, the camera  
changes in steps to the focal length (equivalent to 35mm [135] format of angle of  
view) of the zoom lens that is set in advance in Zoom memory. The following  
settings are available: 28 mm, 35 mm, 50 mm, 85 mm, 105 mm, 135 mm and  
200 mm.  
Choose the focal length with the rotary multi selector, and then press the k  
button to set the check box to on wor off.  
Multiple focal lengths can be chosen.  
The default setting is on wfor all the check boxes.  
To finish the setting, press the rotary multi selector J.  
B Notes on Zoom Operation  
Operate the zoom control while pressing the wbutton to change the zoom position to focal  
length for which the zoom memory is set to on (A11).  
The changed focal length is the closest to that before the operation. To change the zoom position  
to the next focal length level, release the zoom control and then operate it again.  
Release your finger from the wbutton when using the digital zoom.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
107  
     
Shooting Options: Shooting Menu (A, B, C, DModes)  
Functions that Cannot be Applied Simultaneously  
The flash mode, the focus mode, the self-timer/smile timer/remote control, the  
quick menu, the shooting menu and the specialized menu for E, For N  
cannot be used with other functions.  
Restricted function  
Flash mode  
Setting  
Description  
Focus mode  
When B (Infinity) is selected for shooting, the flash is  
not available.  
Continuous  
When BSS or Multi-shot 16 is selected for  
shooting, the flash is not available.  
When Continuous is selected for shooting, the  
built-in flash is not available (A111).  
The built-in flash is fixed to X(Fill flash) when  
Continuous flash is selected for shooting. The  
Speedlight (external flash unit) cannot be used  
The built-in flash is not available.  
Auto bracketing  
The flash is not available when On is set for shooting.  
Wide-angle  
converter (A104)  
When Flash control is set to Built-in off  
red-eye reduction), (Manual), (Slow sync) and  
(Rear-curtain sync) flash modes cannot be selected.  
,
V(Auto with  
Flash control  
S
Y
Z
Self-timer/Smile  
timer/Remote  
control  
AF area mode  
When Subject tracking is selected for shooting, the  
Self-timer/Smile timer/Remote control are not  
available.  
Focus mode  
Continuous  
B (Infinity) cannot be used when Continuous flash  
is set for shooting.  
Smile timer  
When shooting with the Smile timer, the mode is  
changed to A (autofocus).  
AF area mode  
When Subject tracking is selected for shooting,  
E (manual focus) is not available.  
Image quality  
Image size  
Continuous  
When Multi-shot 16 is selected for shooting, Image  
quality is fixed to Normal.  
Image quality  
Image size is fixed to M 3648×2736 when NRW  
(RAW) is selected for Image quality.  
Image size for a JPEG image can be set when NRW  
(RAW) + Fine, NRW (RAW) + Normal or NRW  
(RAW) + Basic is selected. However, I  
3648×2432, z 3584×2016 and H 2732736  
cannot be selected.  
Continuous  
Image size is fixed to D (2560×1920 pixels) when  
Multi-shot 16 is selected for shooting.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Shooting Options: Shooting Menu (A, B, C, D Modes)  
Restricted function  
ISO sensitivity  
Setting  
Description  
When shooting in Multi-shot 16, ISO sensitivity is  
set automatically according to the brightness when  
shooting mode A, B or C is used. The setting for ISO  
sensitivity is fixed at 400 for shooting mode D.  
Continuous  
White balance  
AF area mode  
Picture Control  
White balance is fixed to Auto when Monochrome  
is selected for shooting.  
When On is selected for shooting, Preset manual is  
not available.  
Wide-angle  
converter (A104)  
Focus mode  
When a setting other than Subject tracking is  
selected and B (Infinity) is selected as the focus  
mode for shooting, the camera focuses at infinity  
regardless of the applied AF area mode option.  
When set to  
E
(manual focus), the AF area mode  
cannot be set.  
When Picture Control is set to Monochrome while  
AF area mode is set to Subject tracking, the AF area  
mode setting automatically changes to Auto.  
Picture Control  
Picture Control  
Metering  
Active D-Lighting When using Active D-Lighting for shooting,  
Contrast in Manual adjustment cannot be adjusted.  
AF area mode  
When AF area mode is set to Center (wide) ,  
Center (normal) or Center (spot) while Metering  
is set to Spot AF area, the Metering setting  
automatically changes to Matrix.  
When AF area mode is set to Subject tracking  
while Metering is set to Spot, the Metering  
setting automatically changes to Matrix.  
Active D-Lighting  
Metering is reset to Matrix when Active D-Lighting  
is set to any mode other than Off.  
Continuous and Auto bracketing are not available  
simultaneously.  
Auto bracketing is reset to Off when Continuous is  
set to any mode other than Single.  
The setting for continuous is reset to Single when  
Auto bracketing is set to any mode other than Off.  
Continuous/Auto Continuous  
bracketing  
(A99)/Auto  
bracketing  
Continuous, BSS, Continuous flash, Multi-shot 16,  
Intvl timer shooting or Auto bracketing and the  
Self-timer/Remote control/Smile timer are not  
available simultaneously.  
Self-timer (  
Smile timer  
A35)/  
(
36)/Remote  
control ( 38)  
BSS, Multi-shot 16 or White balance bracketing  
cannot be used when Image quality is set to NRW  
(RAW), NRW (RAW) + Fine, NRW (RAW) + Normal or  
NRW (RAW) + Basic.  
Image quality  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shooting Options: Shooting Menu (A, B, C, DModes)  
Restricted function Setting  
Description  
Continuous/Auto Picture Control  
White balance bracketing cannot be used when  
Monochrome is selected for shooting.  
bracketing  
Long exposure  
When On is selected for Long exposure NR, Multi-  
shot 16 is not available.  
Distortion control When Distortion control is set to On, Multi-shot 16  
and Intvl timer shooting are not available.  
Continuous flash cannot be used when On is set for  
shooting.  
Wide-angle  
converter (A104)  
Long exposure NR Continuous  
When Multi-shot 16 is selected for shooting, the Long  
exposure NR is not available.  
Distortion control Continuous  
Distortion control cannot be used when Multi-shot 16  
or Intvl timer shooting is selected for shooting.  
When ISO sensitivity is set to 3200 or Hi 1  
Lighting is not available. When 3200 or Hi 1 is selected,  
Active D-Lighting is reset to Off  
,
Active D-  
Active D-Lighting ISO sensitivity  
.
Date imprint is not available when Image quality is  
set to NRW (RAW), NRW (RAW) + Fine, NRW (RAW)  
+ Normal or NRW (RAW) + Basic.  
Date imprint  
Image quality  
Continuous  
When Continuous, BSS or Continuous flash is  
selected for shooting, date imprint is not available.  
Date imprint is not available.  
Auto bracketing  
Photo info.  
Smile timer  
The virtual horizon is not displayed when shooting  
with the smile timer.  
AF area mode  
The virtual horizon and histogram are not displayed  
when shooting with Subject tracking.  
Blink warning does not take effect when using the  
Smile timer, Continuous is set to a setting other than  
Single, or auto bracketing is set.  
Blink warning  
Smile timer  
(
36)/  
Continuous  
99)/Auto  
bracketing (A80)  
Blink warning does not take effect when the tone level  
information is displayed automatically.  
Tone level  
information  
Digital zoom  
Smile timer  
The digital zoom cannot be used when shooting with  
the Smile timer.  
Focus mode  
The digital zoom cannot be used when E (manual  
focus) is selected.  
AF area mode  
The digital zoom cannot be used when shooting with  
Subject tracking.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shooting Options: Shooting Menu (A, B, C, DModes)  
Restricted function  
Digital zoom  
Setting  
Description  
The digital zoom cannot be used when Image quality  
is set to NRW (RAW), NRW (RAW) + Fine, NRW  
(RAW) + Normal or NRW (RAW) + Basic.  
Image quality  
Continuous  
The digital zoom cannot be used when Multi-shot 16  
is selected for shooting.  
Slow shutter  
speed  
ISO sensitivity  
When the shooting mode is  
shutter speed is restricted to four seconds when the  
ISO sensitivity is High ISO sensitivity auto or  
A
,
B
or  
C, the slowest  
1600, 1/2 second when the ISO sensitivity is 3200  
,
and 1/8 second when the ISO sensitivity is Hi 1  
.
When the shooting mode is D, the slowest shutter  
speed is restricted to 15 seconds when the ISO  
sensitivity is 800, four seconds when the ISO  
sensitivity is 1600, 1/2 second when the ISO  
sensitivity is 3200, and 1/8 second when the ISO  
sensitivity is Hi 1.  
Continuous  
When Continuous, BSS or Continuous flash is  
selected for shooting, the slowest shutter speed is  
restricted to 1/2 second.  
When Multi-shot 16 is selected for shooting, the  
slowest shutter speed is restricted to 1/30 second.  
Built-in flash, Speedlights (external flash unit)  
The operation of the built-in flash and the Speedlight SB-400, SB-600 and SB-900 flash units  
(available separately from Nikon) are restricted as shown below, depending on the  
Continuous setting that is applied.  
*
Continuous mode  
Single  
Built-in flash  
Available  
Off  
Flash units  
Available  
Continuous  
Available  
BSS  
Off  
Not available  
Not available  
Not available  
Available  
Continuous flash  
Multi-shot 16  
Intvl timer shooting  
Auto bracketing  
Available  
Off  
Available  
Off  
Available  
When a flash unit (available separately from Nikon) is mounted on the camera’s accessory  
shoe, the built-in flash is automatically set to W(Off).  
*
When shooting using Continuous or Auto bracketing with the flash mode set to V(Auto  
with red-eye reduction) (A32, 34), only the pre-flash element of red-eye reduction is  
performed.  
B More Information  
See “Notes on Digital Zoom” (A178) for more information.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
E, Fand N(User Setting Modes)  
Up to three setting combinations that are frequently used for shooting (user  
settings) can be saved in E, Fand N. The saved settings can be immediately  
retrieved for shooting simply by rotating the mode dial to E, For N. This is  
convenient when you want to shoot with these settings, or you only want to  
slightly change the settings. Shooting is possible in A(Programmed auto), B  
(Shutter-priority auto), C(Aperture-priority auto) and D(Manual). The following  
settings can be saved in E, For N.  
Specialized Menu for E, For N  
Shooting mode  
Photo info  
2
Focal length (35mm equiv.)  
1
3
Initial monitor display  
Flash mode  
Focus mode  
4
5
AF area mode  
AF assist  
6
3
Quick Menu  
Image quality  
Image size  
ISO sensitivity  
White balance  
Auto bracketing  
7
Shooting Menu  
Picture Control  
Metering  
Continuous  
Autofocus mode  
Flash exp. comp.  
Noise reduction filter  
Long exposure NR  
Distortion control  
Wide-angle converter  
Flash control  
Active D-Lighting  
Zoom memory  
1
2
Choose the standard shooting mode (default setting is A). The current flexible program (when set  
to A), shutter speed (when set to Bor D) or aperture value (when set to Cor D) settings are also  
saved.  
Set the zoom position for when the mode dial is set. Choose 28 mm (default setting), 35 mm, 50  
mm, 85 mm, 105 mm, 135 mm, 200 mm or Current zoom position.  
This setting is not applied to the setup menu settings.  
Set the information displayed on the monitor when the mode dial is set (default setting is Show  
info).  
3
4
5
6
7
The current focus distance is also saved when the focus mode is E (manual focus).  
The current focus area position is saved when AF area mode is set to Manual.  
The preset value for preset manual applies to the A, B, C, D, E, Fand Nshooting modes.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
E, F and N (User Setting Modes)  
Save the Settings in E, F or N  
The frequently used settings for shooting can be changed and saved in E, F  
and N.  
1
Rotate the mode dial to E, F or N.  
2
Change to a frequently used combination of shooting settings.  
Press the d button to display the menu and switch between tabs with the rotary  
multi selector (A13).  
- E, F, N tabs: Display the specialized menus for E, F and N.  
- A, B, C, D tabs: Display the shooting menus.  
Display the quick menu by pressing the quick menu button (A10, 67).  
Use the rotary multi selector to select and set menu options (A12).  
3
4
After changing the settings, choose Save user  
settings in the specialized menu for E, F  
or N, and press the k button.  
User settings  
Save user settings  
Reset user settings  
Shooting mode  
Focal length (35mm equiv.)  
Photo info  
Initial monitor display  
Flash mode  
Choose Yes and press the k button.  
Save user settings  
Save current settings?  
The current settings are saved.  
Rotate the zoom control to g (i) to show the settings.  
Yes  
No  
Info  
B Clock battery  
If the internal clock battery (A171) is exhausted, the settings saved in E, F or N will be reset.  
Writing down any important setting is recommended.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
E, F and N (User Setting Modes)  
Shooting in E, F or N (User Setting) Mode  
Rotate the mode dial to E, F or N to retrieve the  
settings saved in “Save the Settings in E, F or N”  
Frame the subject and shoot with these settings, or  
change the settings as required.  
The setting combinations that are retrieved when the  
mode dial is rotated to E, F or N can be changed as many times as you  
want in Save user settings.  
Resetting Saved Settings  
The settings that are saved for E, F and N can be reset.  
1
Rotate the mode dial to E, F or N.  
Set the user setting mode to reset.  
2
In the specialized menu screen for E, F or  
N, choose Reset user settings and press the  
k button.  
User settings  
Save user settings  
Reset user settings  
Shooting mode  
Focal length (35mm equiv.)  
Photo info  
Initial monitor display  
Flash mode  
3
Choose Yes and press the k button.  
Reset user settings  
User settings U1 will be reset to  
default values. OK?  
The saved settings are reset.  
Yes  
No  
C Resetting for E, F and N  
The settings that are saved in the user settings are reset as follows:  
Specialized menus for E, F and N: Shooting mode: A Programmed auto, Focal length:  
28 mm, Photo info: information hidden, Initial monitor display: Show info, Flash mode:  
U Auto, Focus: A Autofocus, AF area mode: w Auto, AF assist: Auto  
Shooting menu, quick menu: Same as the default setting for each item  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
More on Playback  
Operations in Full-Frame Playback  
In shooting mode, press the c(playback) button to  
enter playback mode and play back the images that  
have been shot (A30). The following operations can  
be performed in full-frame playback mode.  
15/11/2010 15:30  
0004.JPG  
4
132  
To  
Use  
Description  
A
Press H, I, Jor Kto choose a picture to  
display.  
Press and hold H, I, Jor Kto fast  
forward pictures.  
Choose pictures  
Pictures can also be chosen by rotating the  
rotary multi selector or the command dial.  
Thumbnail display/  
Calendar display  
(except for list by date  
mode)  
Choose the date of  
recording again for  
playback (list by date  
mode)  
Display images by 4, 9 or 16 picture thumbnails.  
Rotate the zoom control towards the  
f(h) in the 16-picture thumbnail display 117  
to change to the calendar display.  
f(h)  
Rotate the zoom control towards the f(h) in  
full-frame playback mode to return to the list by 119  
date screen.  
Enlarge the view of the picture currently  
displayed on the monitor, up to about 10×.  
Press the kbutton to return to the full-  
Playback zoom  
g(i)  
frame playback mode.  
Hide or show the shooting information, photo  
Switch between  
displays  
information and tone level information on the  
x
k
monitor.  
Record or play back voice memos up to  
20 seconds in length.  
Record/play voice  
memos  
Play back the displayed movies.  
Delete the displayed pictures.  
Display the playback menu.  
Play back movies  
Delete pictures  
Display menu  
l
d
Choose a picture on a  
specified date  
g(C)  
Switch to list by date mode.  
c
Press the cbutton or shutter-release  
button to enter the shooting mode.  
Switch to shooting  
mode  
C Changing the Orientation (Vertical and Horizontal Positioning) of Pictures  
Change using Rotate image (A130) in the playback menu after shooting (A122).  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Viewing Multiple Pictures: Thumbnail Playback  
Rotate the zoom control to f(h) in full-frame  
1/ 132  
playback mode (A30, 115) to display pictures as  
thumbnail images in thumbnail playback mode (except  
for list by date mode).  
The following operations can be performed in  
thumbnail playback mode.  
Description  
To  
Use  
A
Rotate the rotary multi selector, or press H  
, I,  
J, or K.  
Choose pictures  
Rotate the command dial.  
Rotate the zoom control towards the f(h)  
direction to increase the number of  
thumbnails from 4 9 16 Calendar  
display.  
In calendar display, the images can be  
selected according to date by moving the  
cursor (A117).  
Increase the number  
of thumbnails  
displayed/Calendar  
display  
f(h)  
Rotate towards the g(i) direction to return to  
thumbnail display.  
-
Rotate the zoom control towards the g(i)  
direction to decrease the number of  
thumbnails from 16 9 4.  
Rotate towards g(i) again during 4  
thumbnails display to return to full-frame  
playback.  
Decrease number of  
picture thumbnails  
displayed  
g(i)  
Return to full-frame  
playback  
30,  
k
Press the kbutton.  
Delete pictures  
l
Delete the selected picture.  
c
Switch to the  
shooting mode  
Press the cbutton or shutter-release button  
to enter the shooting mode.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Viewing Multiple Pictures: Thumbnail Playback  
C Icons on the Thumbnails  
When pictures with Print set (A123) and  
Protect (A129) settings are selected, the  
icons shown on the right appear.  
Protect icon  
Print-set icon  
1/ 132  
Movies are displayed as film frames.  
Film frames  
Calendar Display  
Rotate the zoom control towards f(h) during  
playback mode when 16 thumbnails are displayed  
(A116) to change to calendar display.  
Move the cursor and choose images by selecting a date.  
Dates for which pictures exist are underlined in yellow.  
2010 11  
1
8
2
9
3
4
5
6
7
10 11 12 13  
14 15 16 17 18 19 20  
21 22 23 24 25 26 27  
28 29 30  
3
The following operations can be performed in calendar  
display mode.  
To  
Use  
Description  
A
Rotate the rotary multi selector, or press H  
, I,  
J, or K.  
Select date  
Rotate the command dial.  
Return to full-frame  
playback  
Change to full-frame playback for displaying 30,  
k
the first picture for that date.  
Return to picture list  
display  
g(i)  
Rotate the zoom control to g(i).  
-
B Notes on Calendar display  
Images taken without the date set are treated as images taken on “January 1, 2010.”  
dand lbuttons are disabled while the Calendar is displayed.  
D List by Date Mode  
Only the pictures taken on the same date can be played back in list by date mode (A119). The list  
by date options (A121) are also available only for the pictures taken on the selected dates.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom  
Rotate the zoom control to g(i) in full-frame playback  
mode (A30) to zoom in on the current picture,  
enlarging and displaying the center of the picture.  
The guide at lower right shows which portion is enlarged.  
The following operations can be performed while  
3.0  
pictures are zoomed in.  
Description  
To  
Use  
A
Rotate the zoom control to g(i). The zoom  
increases up to about 10×. Zoom also increases  
by rotating the command dial to the right.  
Zoom in  
-
g(i)  
Rotate the zoom control to  
f
(h). When the  
magnification ratio reaches 1×, the display  
returns to full-frame playback mode.  
Zoom also decreases by rotating the  
command dial to the left.  
Zoom out  
-
f(h)  
Press the rotary multi selector H, I, Jor Kto  
move the display area to other areas of the  
picture.  
Move the display  
area  
Return to full-frame  
playback  
Press the kbutton.  
k
Press to save the visible portion only as a  
separate file.  
Crop picture  
d
c
Switch to the  
shooting mode  
Press the cbutton or shutter-release button  
to enter the shooting mode.  
Pictures Taken Using the Face Priority Function  
When the zoom control is rotated to ) during full-  
frame playback mode for pictures taken in Face Priority  
86), the picture is enlarged with the face that was  
detected during shooting at the center (excluding pictures  
that were shot using Continuous 99) or Auto  
bracketing 80)).  
If more than one face was detected, the picture is enlarged with the face that was  
focused on at the center of the monitor. Press the rotary multi selector , or  
to display other faces that were detected.  
g
(i  
(
2.0  
H
,
I
,
J
K
When the zoom control is further rotated in the g(i) or f(h) direction, the  
zoom ratio changes and becomes a normal playback zoom display.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Viewing Pictures by Date (List by Date)  
In list by date mode, pictures taken on the same date can be played back.  
In full-frame playback, zooming of images, editing, and movie playback can be  
performed in the same way as in the normal playback mode. Recording and  
playback of voice memos can also be performed.  
When the d button is pressed and the list by date menu (A121) is displayed,  
all pictures shot on a specified date can be selected for deletion at the same time,  
or slide show, print set or protection can be performed only for the pictures shot  
on a specified date.  
Selecting a Date in List by Date Mode  
1
Press the AE-L/AF-L (C) button during  
playback.  
The list by date screen is displayed.  
2
Use the rotary multi selector to select the  
desired date.  
List by date  
26/11/2010  
4
11  
8
The camera lists up to 29 dates. If pictures exist for more  
than 29 dates, all pictures recorded earlier than the  
most recent 29 dates are listed together as Others.  
20/11/2010  
18/11/2010  
15/11/2010  
4
For the detailed operations in the list by date screen, see  
26/11/2010 15:30  
0004.JPG  
Press the k button to display the first picture for that  
date in full-frame playback.  
Rotate the zoom control to f (h) in full-frame  
playback mode or when displaying the shooting  
information to return to the list by date screen.  
1
4
Press the AE-L/AF-L button to return to the normal  
playback mode.  
B Notes on List by Date Mode  
Only the most recent 9,000 pictures can be displayed in list by date mode. If a date includes the  
9,001st picture, an asterisk (*) is displayed next to the number of pictures for that date.  
Pictures shot when the date was not set are handled as “January 1, 2010.”  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
119  
         
Viewing Pictures by Date (List by Date)  
Operations in List by Date Mode  
The following operations are possible from the list by date screen (Step 2 of A119).  
Description  
To  
Use  
A
Rotate the rotary multi selector, or press Hor  
I.  
Select date  
The date can also be selected by rotating the  
command dial.  
Display the picture shot on the selected date  
in full-frame playback mode.  
Rotate the zoom control to f(h) in full-  
frame playback to return to the list by date  
screen.  
Switch to full-frame  
playback  
k
Delete all pictures of the chosen date. Choose  
Yes on the deletion confirmation screen.  
Delete Pictures  
l
View list by date  
menu  
d
Display the list by date menu.  
Switch to the normal  
playback mode  
g(C)  
Switch to the normal playback mode.  
c
Switch to the  
shooting mode  
Press the cbutton or shutter-release button  
to enter the shooting mode.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Viewing Pictures by Date (List by Date)  
List by Date Menus  
In list by date mode, press the dbutton to enable the following operations for  
only the pictures shot on the specified date.  
*
Quick retouch  
D-Lighting  
Print set  
Slide show  
Delete  
*
Protect  
Rotate image  
*
Hide image  
Small picture  
Black border  
*
*
*
Skin softening  
*
Straighten  
*
Miniature effect  
NRW (RAW) processing A143  
*
* During full-frame playback only  
When the dbutton is pressed in the list by date screen (A119), options can be  
applied to all pictures shot on the same date, or all pictures shot on the same date  
can be deleted.  
To apply options to individual pictures, or to select individual pictures for deletion,  
display a full-frame picture and press the dbutton.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playback Options: Playback Menu  
The following options are available in playback menu.  
k
Quick retouch  
Easily create retouched images in which contrast and saturation have been enhanced.  
I
D-Lighting  
Enhance brightness and contrast in dark portions of pictures.  
a
Print set  
Select pictures to print and the number of copies for each.  
b
c
Slide show  
View pictures stored in the internal memory or on a memory card in an automatic slide show.  
Delete  
Delete a picture. Multiple pictures can be deleted.  
Protect  
d
f
Protect selected pictures from accidental deletion.  
Rotate image  
Change the orientation of an existing picture.  
Hide image  
i
Hide the selected pictures so that they cannot be played back on the camera screen.  
g
h
j
Small picture  
Create a small copy of the picture taken.  
Copy  
Copy files between the memory card and internal memory.  
Black border  
Create a new picture surrounded by a black border.  
Skin softening  
e
Make the subject’s skin appear smoother.  
Straighten  
R
S
F
Compensate for the slanting of shot pictures.  
Miniature effect  
Create a copy that appears to be a photo of a diorama.  
NRW (RAW) processing  
Create JPEG images by RAW processing NRW (RAW) images.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playback Options: Playback Menu  
Displaying the Playback Menu  
Press the dbutton to display the menu, use the rotary multi selector to change  
to the ctab and display the playback menu (A13).  
15/11/2010 15:30  
0004.JPG  
Playback menu  
Quick retouch  
D-Lighting  
Print set  
Slide show  
Delete  
Protect  
4
132  
Rotate image  
Use the rotary multi selector to select items and set functions on menus (A12).  
To exit the playback menu, press the dbutton.  
a
Print Set: Setting the Pictures and Number of Copies to Print  
Press the dbutton Mc(Playback menu) (A123) Ma Print set  
If you choose to use one of the following methods to print pictures that are  
recorded on a memory card, the pictures to print and the number of copies can be  
set in advance on the memory card.  
Printing with a DPOF-compatible (A220) printer that is equipped with a card  
slot.  
Ordering the prints from a digital photo lab that has a DPOF service.  
Printing by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible (A220) printer  
(A161). (When the memory card is removed from the camera, the print settings  
can also be performed for the pictures recorded on the internal memory.)  
1
Choose Select images and press the k  
button.  
Print set  
Select images  
Delete print set  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Playback Options: Playback Menu  
2
Choose the pictures (up to a maximum of 99)  
and number of copies (up to nine per picture).  
Print selection  
1
1
3
Rotate the rotary multi selector or press Jor Kto  
choose the pictures, and press Hor Ito set the  
number of copies for each.  
Pictures can also be chosen by rotating the command dial.  
Pictures selected for printing can be recognized by the  
check mark icon and the numeral indicating the  
Back  
number of copies to be printed. A check mark is not displayed with pictures for which  
no copies have been specified and these pictures are not printed.  
Rotate the zoom control to g(i) to switch to full-frame playback, or f(h) to switch  
to 12 thumbnails display.  
Press the kbutton when setting is complete.  
3
Choose whether or not to also print shooting  
date and photo information.  
Print set  
Done  
Choose Date and press the kbutton to print the  
shooting date on all pictures in the print order.  
Choose Info and press the kbutton to print shooting  
information (shutter speed and aperture value) on all  
pictures in the print order.  
Date  
Info  
Choose Done and press the kbutton to complete the  
print order.  
Pictures selected for printing are recognized by the w  
icon displayed with playback.  
15/11/2010 15:30  
0004.JPG  
4
132  
C Deleting All Print Orders  
In step 1 of the print set procedure (A123), choose Delete print set and press the kbutton to  
delete the print orders for all pictures.  
D More Information  
See “Printing Images of Size 1:1” (A72) for more information.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playback Options: Playback Menu  
B Notes on Print Set  
When setting a print order in list by date mode and pictures other  
than those on the chosen date are already set for printing, the  
screen shown on the right is displayed.  
Print set  
Save print marking for other  
dates?  
-
Select Yes to add pictures taken on the selected shooting date,  
to the existing print order.  
-
Select No to remove print marking from previously marked  
pictures and restrict the print order to pictures taken on the  
selected shooting date.  
Yes  
No  
If the total number of the pictures in a print order exceeds 99, the  
screen shown on the right is displayed.  
Print set  
Too many images selected.  
Remove print marking for  
other dates?  
-
Select Yes to remove pictures previously added from the print  
order and restrict the print order to pictures just marked.  
Select Cancel to remove the pictures just added from the print  
order and restrict the print order to pictures previously marked.  
-
Yes  
Cancel  
NRW (RAW) pictures cannot be set for printing. Create a JPEG picture using NRW (RAW)  
processing (A143), and then set the JPEG picture for printing.  
B Notes on Printing Shooting Date and Photo Information  
When the Date and Info options are enabled in the Print set menu, shooting date and photo  
information are printed on pictures when a DPOF-compatible (A220) printer which supports  
printing of shooting date and photo information is used.  
Photo information cannot be printed when the camera is connected directly to a printer, via the  
supplied USB cable, for DPOF printing (A166).  
Date and Info are reset each time the Print set menu is displayed.  
The date and time printed on the picture is the date and time  
recorded on the camera when the picture was taken. The date and  
time printed using this option are not affected if the camera’s Date  
setting is changed from the setup menu after the pictures are  
taken.  
15/11/2010  
D Date imprint  
The shooting date and time can be imprinted in pictures at the time of shooting by using Date  
imprint (A174) in the setup menu. This information can be printed even from printers that do not  
support printing of the date and time. Only the date and time of Date imprint on the pictures are  
printed, even if Print set is enabled with the date selected in the print set screen.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playback Options: Playback Menu  
b Slide Show  
Press the dbutton Mc(Playback menu) (A123) Mb Slide show  
View pictures stored in the internal memory or on a memory card in an automatic  
slide show.  
1
Use the rotary multi selector to choose Start  
and press the kbutton.  
Slide show  
Pause  
To change the interval between pictures, choose  
Frame intvl, select the desired interval time, and press  
the kbutton before choosing Start.  
Start  
Frame intvl  
3s  
Loop  
To repeat the slide show automatically, enable Loop  
and press the kbutton before choosing Start. The  
check mark (w) is added to the loop option when enabled.  
2
3
The slide show begins.  
Press the rotary multi selector Kto display the next  
picture, or Jto display the previous picture. Press and  
hold Kto fast forward, or Jto rewind.  
To exit partway or pause, press the kbutton.  
Choose End or Restart.  
When exiting or pausing the slide show, the screen  
shown on the right is displayed. Choose End and press  
the kbutton to return to the playback menu. Choose  
Restart to play the slide show again.  
Pause  
Restart  
End  
Frame intvl  
B Notes on Slide Shows  
Only the first frame of movies (A151) included in slide shows is displayed.  
Slide shows play for a maximum of 30 minutes, even when Loop is selected (A181).  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playback Options: Playback Menu  
c Delete: Deleting Multiple Pictures  
Press the dbutton Mc(Playback menu) (A123) Mc Delete  
Delete a picture. Multiple pictures can also be deleted.  
Erase selected images  
In the picture selection screen, choose the pictures for deletion. See “Selecting  
Pictures” (A128) for more information.  
When images saved with an Image quality (A68) setting of NRW (RAW) +  
Fine, NRW (RAW) + Normal or NRW (RAW) + Basic are chosen, the NRW (RAW)  
and JPEG images are deleted at the same time.  
Erase all images  
Delete all pictures.  
Erase selected NRW images  
Only NRW (RAW) pictures are displayed in the picture selection screen. Select and  
delete pictures.  
For pictures where NRW (RAW) and JPEG images are recorded at the same time,  
only the NRW (RAW) image is deleted.  
Erase selected JPEG images  
Only JPEG pictures are displayed in the picture selection screen. Select and delete  
pictures.  
For pictures where NRW (RAW) and JPEG images are recorded at the same time,  
only the JPEG image is deleted.  
B Notes on Deletion  
Once deleted, pictures cannot be recovered. Transfer important images to a computer before  
deletion.  
Pictures marked with the s icon are protected and cannot be deleted (A129).  
I is displayed in the picture selection screen for pictures where NRW (RAW) and JPEG images  
are recorded at the same time.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Playback Options: Playback Menu  
Selecting Pictures  
The picture selection screen, as shown on the right, is  
displayed in the following menus.  
Erase selected images  
Only one picture can be selected for some menu items,  
while for other menu items, multiple pictures can be  
selected.  
Back  
Functions for which only one picture can be Functions for which multiple pictures can  
selected be selected  
Playback menu: Playback menu:  
Quick retouch* (A135) ,  
D-Lighting* (A136) ,  
Rotate image (A130),  
Small picture* (A137),  
Black border* (A138),  
Skin softening* (A139),  
Straighten* (A141),  
Select images in Print set (A123),  
Erase selected images in Delete (A127),  
Protect (A129),  
Hide image (A130),  
Selected images in Copy (A131)  
Miniature effect* (A142),  
NRW (RAW) processing (A143)  
Setup menu:  
Select an image in Welcome screen  
*
These menus are displayed if menu items are selected when the playback menu has been  
displayed from a mode other than playback mode (A13).  
Follow the procedure described below to select pictures.  
1
Rotate the rotary multi selector, or press Jor  
Kto choose the desired picture.  
Erase selected images  
Pictures can also be chosen by rotating the command  
dial.  
Rotate the zoom control to g(i) to switch to full-frame  
playback, or f(h) to switch to 12 thumbnails display.  
For functions for which only one picture is selected,  
proceed to step 3.  
Back  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playback Options: Playback Menu  
2
3
Press Hor Ito select ON or OFF (or the  
number of copies).  
Erase selected images  
When ON is selected, a check mark is displayed in the  
current picture. To set multiple pictures, repeat steps 1  
and 2.  
Back  
Press the kbutton to apply the picture selection.  
With selections such as Erase selected images, the confirmation dialog is displayed.  
Follow the instructions on the screen.  
d Protect  
Press the dbutton Mc(Playback menu) (A123) Md Protect  
Protect selected pictures from accidental deletion.  
In the picture selection screen, choose a picture and set or cancel protection. See  
“Selecting Pictures” (A128) for more information.  
Note, however, that formatting the camera’s internal memory or the memory card  
permanently erases the protected files (A182).  
Protected pictures are recognized by the s icon in playback mode (A8, 117).  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playback Options: Playback Menu  
f Rotate Image  
Press the dbutton Mc(Playback menu) (A123) Mf Rotate image  
Change the orientation of pictures played back in the camera’s monitor after  
shooting. Still pictures can be rotated 90° clockwise or counterclockwise.  
Pictures that were recorded in the “tall” (portrait) orientation can be rotated up to  
180° in either direction.  
Select a picture in the picture selection screen (A128) to display the rotate image  
screen. Rotate the rotary multi selector, or press Jor Kto rotate the picture 90°.  
Rotate image  
Rotate image  
Rotate image  
Back  
Rotate  
Back  
Rotate  
Back  
Rotate  
Rotate 90°  
counterclockwise  
Rotate 90°  
clockwise  
Press the kbutton to set the orientation displayed and save the orientation data  
with the picture.  
i Hide Image  
Press the dbutton Mc(Playback menu) (A123) Mi Hide image  
Hide pictures so that they cannot be played back on the camera screen.  
In the picture selection screen, choose the pictures and set or cancel the hide  
setting. See “Selecting Pictures” (A128) for more information.  
Hidden pictures cannot be deleted using the Delete option. Note, however, that  
formatting the internal memory or memory card (A182) permanently erases the  
hidden pictures.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Playback Options: Playback Menu  
h
Copy: Copying Between the Internal Memory and Memory Card  
Press the dbutton Mc(Playback menu) (A123) Mh Copy  
Copy pictures between the internal memory and a memory card.  
1
Use the rotary multi selector to select an  
option from the copy screen and press the k  
button.  
Copy  
q: Copy pictures from the internal memory to  
the memory card.  
r: Copy pictures from the memory card to the  
internal memory.  
2
Select a copy option and press the kbutton.  
Camera to card  
Selected images  
All images  
Selected images: In the picture selection screen  
(A128), choose the pictures for  
copying.  
All images: Copy all pictures.  
B Notes on Copying Pictures  
JPEG-, NRW-, MOV-, and WAV-format files can be copied. Files recorded in any other format cannot  
be copied.  
If voice memos (A132) are attached to pictures selected for copying, voice memos are copied  
with the pictures.  
When images saved with an Image quality (A68) setting of NRW (RAW) + Fine, NRW (RAW)  
+ Normal or NRW (RAW) + Basic are chosen, the NRW (RAW) and JPEG images are copied at the  
same time.  
Pictures recorded with another make or model of camera or that have been modified on a  
computer cannot be copied.  
When pictures with Print set (A123) settings are copied, the print set settings are not copied.  
When pictures with Protect (A129) settings are copied, the copied pictures are also protected.  
Pictures with Hide image (A130) settings cannot be copied.  
C Message: “Memory contains no images.”  
If there are no pictures stored on the memory card when playback mode is selected, the message,  
Memory contains no images., is displayed. Press the dbutton to display the copy option screen,  
and copy the pictures stored in the camera’s internal memory to the memory card.  
D More Information  
See “File and Folder Names” (A203) for more information.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Voice Memos: Recording and Playback  
Use the built-in or external microphone to record voice  
memos for pictures marked with n in full-frame  
15/11/2010 15:30  
0004.JPG  
playback mode (A30).  
4
132  
Recording Voice Memos  
A voice memo, up to 20 seconds in length, is  
recorded while the kbutton is pressed  
down.  
Do not touch the microphone during  
recording.  
17  
During recording, o and p blink on the  
monitor.  
Playing Voice Memos  
Pictures with recorded voice memos can be  
recognized by the q icon in the full-  
frame playback mode. Display a recorded  
picture in the full-frame playback mode, and  
press the kbutton.  
15/11/2010 15:30  
0004.JPG  
4
132  
Use the zoom control gor fduring  
playback to adjust the volume.  
Press the kbutton again during playback to end the playback.  
Deleting Voice Memos  
Choose a picture with a voice memo and press the  
lbutton. Use the rotary multi selector to choose w  
and press the kbutton. Only the voice memo is  
deleted.  
Erase 1 image?  
Yes  
No  
B Notes on Voice Memos  
When a picture with a voice memo attached is deleted, both the picture and its voice memo are  
deleted.  
Voice memos cannot be recorded for a picture that already has a voice memo attached. The  
current voice memo must be deleted before a new voice memo can be recorded.  
Voice memos cannot be attached to pictures shot with cameras other than the COOLPIX P7000.  
D More Information  
See “File and Folder Names” (A203) for more information.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Editing Pictures  
Picture Editing Functions  
Images can be easily edited with this camera using the functions below. Edited  
images are stored as separate files (A203).  
Editing function  
Application  
Quick retouch (A135)  
Easily create a copy with enhanced contrast and richer colors.  
Create a copy of the current picture with enhanced brightness  
and contrast, brightening dark portions of the picture.  
D-Lighting (A136)  
Small picture (A137)  
Black border (A138)  
Create a small copy of pictures suitable for uses such as e-mail  
attachments.  
Add a black frame around the picture. Use when you want to  
add a black border to a picture.  
Skin softening (A139) Make the subject’s skin appear smoother.  
Straighten (A141)  
Compensate for the slanting.  
Miniature effect (A142) Create a copy that appears to be a photo of a diorama.  
Create JPEG-format copies by performing RAW processing  
within the camera for NRW (RAW) images without having to use  
a computer.  
NRW (RAW) processing  
Crop picture. Enlarge the image or refine the composition and  
Crop (A145)  
create a copy containing only the portion visible on the monitor.  
B Notes on Picture Editing  
Pictures shot with an Image size (A70) of I 3648×2432, z 3584×2016, and H 2732736  
can only be modified using the Black border editing function.  
When no faces can be detected in the picture, skin softening cannot be applied (A139).  
Editing other than NRW (RAW) processing cannot be performed on NRW (RAW) images. Edit a JPEG  
picture created with NRW (RAW) processing.  
The COOLPIX P7000’s editing functions are not available for pictures shot with digital cameras  
other than the COOLPIX P7000.  
If a copy created using the COOLPIX P7000 is viewed on a different digital camera, it may not be  
possible to display the picture properly or transfer it to a computer.  
Editing functions are not available when there is not enough free space in the internal memory or  
on the memory card.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Picture Editing Functions  
C Restrictions on Picture Editing  
The following limitations apply when editing pictures that were created by editing.  
Copies Created By:  
Can Be Edited By:  
Quick retouch  
D-Lighting  
Skin softening, Small picture, or crop can be used. Quick retouch  
and D-Lighting cannot be used together.  
Small picture  
Straighten  
Miniature effect  
Crop  
No additional editing functions can be used.  
Skin softening  
Quick retouch, D-Lighting, Small picture or crop can be used.  
No additional editing functions can be used. A black border  
cannot be added to a picture created with a different editing  
function.  
Black border  
NRW (RAW) processing  
Additional editing functions can be used.  
Copies created by editing cannot be edited again using the same edit function.  
To use an editing function together with small picture or crop, use the other edit function first, and  
use small picture or crop as the last edit function performed on that picture.  
Pictures that were taken using skin softening can be edited using skin softening.  
D Original Pictures and Edited Copies  
Copies created with editing functions are not deleted if the original pictures are deleted. The  
original pictures are not deleted if copies created with editing functions are deleted.  
Edited copies are stored with the same recording date and time as the original.  
Even if the pictures that are marked for Print set (A123) or Protect (A129) are used for editing,  
these settings are not reflected on the edited copies.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing Pictures  
k Quick Retouch: Enhancing Contrast and Saturation  
Easily create retouched images in which contrast and saturation have been  
enhanced. Retouched copies are stored as separate files.  
1
Choose the desired picture from full-frame  
(A30) or thumbnail (A116) playback mode  
and press the d button.  
Switch to the c tab when the playback menu is not  
displayed (A14).  
2
Use the rotary multi selector to choose  
k Quick retouch and press the k button.  
Playback menu  
Quick retouch  
D-Lighting  
Print set  
Slide show  
Delete  
The original version is shown on the left and the edited  
version is shown on the right.  
Protect  
Rotate image  
3
Press H or I to choose the setting level, and  
press the k button.  
Quick retouch  
A retouched copy is created.  
To cancel, press the d button.  
Normal  
Amount  
Quick retouched copies can be recognized by the s  
icon displayed during playback.  
15/11/2010 15:30  
0004.JPG  
132 132  
D More Information  
See “File and Folder Names” (A203) for more information.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Editing Pictures  
I D-Lighting: Enhancing Brightness and Contrast  
Create copies with enhanced brightness and contrast, brightening dark portions of  
a picture. Enhanced copies are stored as separate files.  
1
Choose the desired picture from full-frame  
(A30) or thumbnail (A116) playback mode  
and press the d button.  
Switch to the c tab when the playback menu is not  
displayed (A14).  
2
Use the rotary multi selector to choose I D-  
Lighting and press the k button.  
Playback menu  
Quick retouch  
D-Lighting  
Print set  
Slide show  
Delete  
The original version is shown on the left and the edited  
version is shown on the right.  
Protect  
Rotate image  
3
Press H or I to choose the setting level, and  
press the k button.  
D-Lighting  
A new, edited copy is created.  
To cancel, press the d button.  
Normal  
Amount  
D-Lighting copies can be recognized by the c icon  
displayed during playback.  
15/11/2010 15:30  
0004.JPG  
132 132  
D More Information  
See “File and Folder Names” (A203) for more information.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Editing Pictures  
g Small Picture: Resizing Pictures  
Create a small copy of the picture taken. Suitable for displaying on web pages or  
sending as e-mail attachments. The available size is l 640×480, m 320×240 or  
n 160×120. Small copies are stored as separate files with a compression ratio of  
1:16.  
1
Choose the desired picture from full-frame  
(A30) or thumbnail (A116) playback mode  
and press the dbutton.  
Switch to the ctab when the playback menu is not  
displayed (A14).  
2
Use the rotary multi selector to choose  
g Small picture and press the kbutton.  
Playback menu  
Hide image  
Small picture  
Copy  
Black border  
Skin softening  
Straighten  
Miniature eect  
3
4
Choose the desired copy size and press the k  
button.  
Small picture  
640×480  
320×240  
160×120  
Choose Yes and press the kbutton.  
A new, smaller copy is created.  
Create small picture file?  
To cancel, choose No and press the kbutton.  
The copy is displayed with a gray frame.  
Yes  
No  
D More Information  
See “File and Folder Names” (A203) for more information.  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Editing Pictures  
j Black Border: Adding a Black Border to Pictures  
This function creates black borders along the border of a picture. Choose from  
Thin, Medium, or Broad lines. The created pictures are stored as separate files.  
1
Choose the desired picture from full-frame  
(A30) or thumbnail (A116) playback mode  
and press the dbutton.  
Switch to the ctab when the playback menu is not  
displayed (A14).  
2
Use the rotary multi selector to choose  
j Black border and press the kbutton.  
Playback menu  
Hide image  
Small picture  
Copy  
Black border  
Skin softening  
Straighten  
Miniature eect  
3
4
Choose the desired frame thickness and press  
the kbutton.  
Black border  
Thin  
Medium  
Broad  
Choose Yes and press the kbutton.  
Create a copy with a  
black border?  
A new copy with a black border is created.  
To cancel, choose No and press the kbutton.  
Copies created by editing with black borders can be  
recognized by the J icon displayed during playback.  
Yes  
No  
B Black Border  
A part of the picture equivalent to the thickness of the black border is cut off because the black  
border overlaps the picture.  
When a picture with a black border is printed using a printer’s borderless print function, the black  
border may not be printed.  
D More Information  
See “File and Folder Names” (A203) for more information.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Editing Pictures  
e Skin Softening: Making Skin Appear Smoother  
Skin softening can be applied to faces that are detected in pictures already taken,  
to make skin appear smoother. Pictures edited with this function are stored as  
separate files.  
1
Choose the desired picture from full-frame  
(A30) or thumbnail (A116) playback mode  
and press the d button.  
Switch to the c tab when the playback menu is not  
displayed (A14).  
2
Use the rotary multi selector to choose e Skin  
softening and press the k button.  
Playback menu  
Hide image  
Small picture  
Copy  
Black border  
Skin softening  
Straighten  
The screen that allows you to set the amount of skin  
softening appears.  
If no faces can be detected in the image, a warning is  
displayed and the screen returns to the playback menu.  
Miniature eect  
3
Press H or I to choose the setting level, and  
press the k button.  
Skin softening  
A confirmation screen is displayed, and the image is  
displayed zoomed in on the face edited by skin  
softening.  
Normal  
Amount  
To cancel, press the d button.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Editing Pictures  
4
Confirm the results.  
Preview  
Up to 12 faces, in order of proximity to the center of the  
frame, can be enhanced.  
When multiple faces are edited using skin softening,  
use the rotary multi selector Jand Kto switch the face  
that is displayed.  
Back  
Save  
To adjust the extent of skin softening, press the d  
button and return to step 3.  
To create a copy edited with skin softening, press the kbutton.  
Copies created by editing with skin softening can be  
15/11/2010 15:30  
0004.JPG  
recognized by the E icon displayed during playback.  
132 132  
B Note on Skin Softening  
Depending on conditions such as the direction the subject is facing or the brightness of the face, the  
face may not be detected properly, or the desired effect may not be achieved.  
D More Information  
See “File and Folder Names” (A203) for more information.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing Pictures  
R Straighten: Compensating for Picture Slanting  
Compensate for the slanting of shot pictures. Pictures edited with this function are stored  
as separate files.  
1
Choose the desired picture from full-frame  
(A30) or thumbnail (A116) playback mode  
and press the dbutton.  
Switch to the ctab when the playback menu is not  
displayed (A14).  
2
Use the rotary multi selector to choose  
R Straighten and press the kbutton.  
Playback menu  
Hide image  
Small picture  
Copy  
The straighten screen is displayed.  
Black border  
Skin softening  
Straighten  
Miniature eect  
3
Compensate for slanting.  
Straighten  
Press  
J
to rotate counterclockwise by 1 degree.  
Press Kto rotate clockwise by 1 degree.  
To cancel, press the dbutton.  
To create a copy edited with straighten, press the k  
Back  
Rotate  
button.  
Copies created by editing with straighten can be  
recognized by the G icon displayed during playback.  
15/11/2010 15:30  
0004.JPG  
132 132  
B Notes on Straighten  
When straighten is performed, the picture edges are cut. The larger the slant for which  
compensation is performed, the larger the area around the picture that is cut.  
Straighten can be performed up to 15 degrees.  
D More Information  
See “File and Folder Names” (A203) for more information.  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Editing Pictures  
S Miniature Effect: Setting Close-up Miniature Effects  
Create a copy that appears to be a photo of a diorama. Pictures taken while looking  
down from a high location and with the main subject near the center of the screen  
are suitable for the miniature effect. Pictures edited with this function are stored as  
separate files.  
1
Choose the desired picture from full-frame  
(A30) or thumbnail (A116) playback mode  
and press the dbutton.  
Switch to the ctab when the playback menu is not  
displayed (A14).  
2
Use the rotary multi selector to choose  
S Miniature effect and press the kbutton.  
Playback menu  
Hide image  
Small picture  
Copy  
Black border  
Skin softening  
Straighten  
Miniature eect  
3
4
Choose OK and press kbutton.  
Miniature eect  
A confirmation screen is displayed.  
To cancel, choose Cancel and press the kbutton.  
OK  
Cancel  
Check the effect and press the kbutton.  
Preview  
A copy is created with the miniature effect applied.  
To cancel, press the dbutton.  
Copies created by editing with miniature effect can be  
recognized by the H icon displayed during playback.  
Save  
D More Information  
See “File and Folder Names” (A203) for more information.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Editing Pictures  
F NRW (RAW) Processing: Creating JPEG Images from  
NRW Images  
Create JPEG-format copies by performing RAW processing within the camera for  
NRW (RAW) images saved with an Image quality (A68) setting of NRW (RAW),  
NRW (RAW) + Fine, NRW (RAW) + Normal or NRW (RAW) + Basic.  
1
2
Press the dbutton in playback mode.  
Switch to the ctab when the playback menu is not  
displayed (A14).  
Use the rotary multi selector to choose  
F NRW (RAW) processing and press the  
kbutton.  
Playback menu  
NRW (RAW) processing  
3
Rotate the rotary multi selector or press Jor  
Kto choose the picture to be RAW processed  
and press the kbutton.  
NRW (RAW) processing  
The NRW (RAW) processing menu is displayed.  
Back  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Editing Pictures  
4
Set the NRW (RAW) processing parameters.  
NRW (RAW) processing  
White balance  
Apply the settings below while checking the image and  
rotating the zoom control to g(i). Rotate to g(i)  
again to return to the setting screen.  
-
White balance: Choose a white balance setting  
EXE  
Check  
Reset  
-
-
-
-
Exp. +/-: Adjust the brightness.  
Picture Control: Choose an image processing setting (A92).  
Image quality: Choose the image quality from Fine, Normal, or Basic (A68).  
Image size: Choose an image size (A70). The image is cropped if I 3648×2432,  
z 3584×2016 or H 2732736 is selected.  
-
-
Distortion control: Set the distortion control (A104).  
D-Lighting: Enhance brightness and contrast in dark portions of pictures (A136).  
Press the lbutton to change back to the default settings.  
Choose EXE when all settings have been adjusted.  
5
Choose Yes and press the kbutton.  
An NRW (RAW) processed JPEG image is created.  
Create a JPEG copy at these  
settings?  
To cancel the creation, choose No.  
Yes  
No  
B Notes on NRW (RAW) Processing  
The COOLPIX P7000 can only create JPEG-format copies of NRW (RAW) images taken with the  
COOLPIX P7000.  
NRW (RAW) processing > White balance > Preset manual cannot be selected for photographs  
taken at a White balance setting other than Preset manual.  
D More Information  
See “File and Folder Names” (A203) for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
144  
Editing Pictures  
a Crop: Cropping Pictures  
Create a copy containing only the portion visible on the monitor when  
u
is displayed  
with playback zoom (  
118) enabled. Cropped copies are stored as separate files.  
1
Rotate the zoom control to ) in full-frame  
g
(i  
playback mode ( 30) to zoom in on the picture.  
To crop a picture displayed in “tall” (portrait) orientation,  
zoom in on the picture until the black bars displayed on  
the both sides of the monitor disappear. The cropped  
picture is displayed in landscape orientation. To crop the  
picture in its current “tall” (portrait) orientation, first, use  
the Rotate image option (A130) to rotate the picture so  
that it is displayed in landscape orientation. Next, enlarge  
the picture for cropping, crop the picture, and then rotate  
the cropped picture back to “tall” (portrait) orientation.  
2
Refine copy composition.  
Rotate the zoom control to  
zoom ratio.  
g
(i  
) or  
f
(
h
) to adjust the  
to scroll the  
Press the rotary multi selector  
H
,
I
,
J
or  
K
picture until only the portion you want to copy is visible on  
the monitor.  
4.0  
3
4
Press the dbutton.  
Use the rotary multi selector to choose Yes and  
press the kbutton.  
Save this image as  
displayed?  
A new picture, containing only the portion visible on the  
monitor, is created.  
To cancel, choose No and press the kbutton.  
Yes  
No  
C Image Size  
The smaller the cropping range, the smaller the size (amount of pixels) of the cropped picture copy.  
When the image size setting for a cropped copy is 320×240 or 160×120, a gray frame appears around  
the picture during playback, and the  
B
or  
C
small picture icon appears on the left side of the monitor.  
D More Information  
See “File and Folder Names” (A203) for more information.  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Movie Recording and Playback  
Recording Movies  
High-definition movies can be shot with sound.  
Regardless of the remaining memory on the memory card, the maximum length  
for a single movie is 29 minutes.  
1
Rotate the mode dial to D.  
The monitor shows the amount of available recording  
time.  
2
3
Press the shutter-release button all  
the way down to start recording.  
The camera focuses in the center focus  
area. The focus area is not displayed when  
the movie is recorded.  
7m23s  
When shooting high-definition or full  
high-definition movies, the aspect ratio of  
the shooting screen is switched to 16:9 (The movie is recorded in the range shown in  
the screen on the right).  
The monitor shows the amount of recording time remaining. Recording stops  
automatically when the recording time runs out.  
Press the shutter-release button all the way down to end recording.  
B Note on Recording Movies  
When the AF lamp blinks after shooting, the movie is being saved. Do not open the battery-chamber/  
memory card slot cover. Cutting the power or removing the memory card before saving is complete  
could result in loss of data or in damage to the camera or card.  
C External Microphones  
Instead of the built-in microphone, a commercially available microphone can be connected to the  
external microphone connector (A5) to record sound during movie recording or voice memos for  
still pictures (A132). Use an external microphone that conforms to the specifications of “External  
microphone connector” in “I/O terminal” (A218) in “Specifications.”  
When the external microphone is connected, Wind noise reduction (A150) in the movie menu  
cannot be used.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Recording Movies  
B Notes on Movie Recording  
When recording a movie onto a memory card, a memory card with an SD speed class of Class 6 or  
higher is recommended (A221). If the transfer speed of the card is slow, the movie recording may  
end unexpectedly.  
Using a digital zoom causes image quality to deteriorate. If you start recording the movie without  
using digital zoom, and you rotate the zoom control in the gdirection, the zoom stops at the  
maximum optical zoom ratio. Release the zoom control and rotate it again in the gdirection to  
trigger digital zoom.  
The sound of using the zoom control, zoom, autofocus, vibration reduction or aperture control  
when the brightness changes may be recorded. To minimize the recording of the zoom sound, set  
Zoom speed in the setup menu to Auto (default setting) or Quiet (A179).  
Smear (A198) visible in the monitor when recording movies will be recorded with the movies.  
Avoiding bright objects such as the sun, reflections of the sun, and electric lights when recording  
movies is recommended.  
B Notes on Autofocus  
When Autofocus mode in the movie menu is set to A Single AF (default setting), the focus is  
locked when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway (A150).  
Autofocus may not perform as expected (A29). Should this occur, try the following:  
1. Before recording, set Autofocus mode in the movie menu to A Single AF (default setting).  
2. Position a different subject at the same distance in the middle of the screen. Press the shutter-  
release button to start the movie recording, and change the composition.  
B Notes on the Camera Temperature  
When functions such as movie recording are used for a long time, or when the camera is used in a location  
with a high ambient temperature, the camera temperature may rise. This is not a malfunction.  
C Functions Available in Movie Recording  
Exposure compensation (A43) can be adjusted. A (Autofocus), D (Macro close-up) or  
B (Infinity) can be selected for focus mode (A40).  
Quick-response remote in the remote control mode (A38) is available. Self-timer and Smile timer  
cannot be used.  
Flash does not fire.  
Rotate the quick menu dial to aor cand press the quick menu button to set Movie options  
(A148) or White balance (A76).  
Press the dbutton before starting to record the movie to display the D(movie) tab and select  
movie menu settings (A149).  
Settings cannot be changed during movie recording. Before movie recording, check the settings.  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Recording Movies  
Selecting a Movie Type to Shoot  
You can choose the type of movie to shoot. The higher the resolution and bitrate,  
the higher the picture quality; but the file size also becomes larger.  
Option  
Description  
Movies with an aspect ratio of 16:9 are recorded in high-  
x HD 720p (1280×720)  
definition. This option is suited to playback on a wide screen TV.  
(default setting)  
Image size: 1280×720 pixels  
Movie bitrate: 9 Mbps  
Movies with an aspect ratio of 4:3 are recorded.  
y VGA (640×480)  
Image size: 640×480 pixels  
Movie bitrate: 3 Mbps  
Movies with an aspect ratio of 4:3 are recorded.  
z QVGA (320×240)  
Image size: 320×240 pixels  
Movie bitrate: 640 kbps  
The movie bitrate is the volume of movie data recorded per second. As a variable  
bitrate (VBR) system has been adopted, the movie recording rate varies automatically  
according to the subject so that more data is recorded per second for movies  
containing frequently moving subjects, thus increasing movie file size.  
The frame rates are approximately 24 frames per second (fps) for HD 720p  
(1280×720) and 30 frames per second (fps) for VGA (640×480) or QVGA (320×240)  
.
Setting the Movie Options  
1
Rotate the quick menu dial to aand press  
the quick menu button.  
The quick menu is displayed.  
Rotate the mode dial (A44) to D.  
2
Choose the movie type with the  
command dial.  
Movie options  
HD 720p (1280×720)  
The maximum movie length for the  
selected movie type is displayed.  
47m15s  
Maximum movie length  
3
After completing the settings, press the quick menu button.  
The monitor display reverts to shooting mode.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Recording Movies  
C Maximum Movie Length  
Internal memory  
(79 MB)  
Memory card  
(4 GB)*  
Option  
x HD 720p (1280×720)  
1 min 10 s  
55 min  
(default setting)  
y VGA (640×480)  
3 min 22 s  
2 h 30 min  
11 h  
z QVGA (320×240)  
13 min 57 s  
All figures are approximate. The maximum movie length varies with the make of the memory card  
and the bitrate of the shot movie.  
*
The maximum recording time for a single movie is 29 minutes. The maximum movie length displayed during  
recording is 29 minutes, even when there is enough free space on the memory card for a longer movie.  
D More Information  
See “File and Folder Names” (A203) for more information.  
Changing the Movie Mode Settings  
The options below can be set in the movie menu.  
Autofocus mode  
Choose how the camera focuses when recording movies.  
Wind noise reduction  
Set whether or not to reduce wind noise during movie recording.  
Displaying the Movie Menu  
Rotate the mode dial to D(movie).  
Press the dbutton to display the menu, use the rotary multi selector to change  
to the Dtab and display the movie menu (A14).  
Movie  
Autofocus mode  
Wind noise reduction  
Use the rotary multi selector to select items and set functions on the menu  
Press the dbutton to exit the movie menu.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Recording Movies  
Autofocus Mode  
Set to D(Movie) MdMD(Movie menu) (A149) MAutofocus mode  
Choose how the camera focuses when recording movies.  
Option  
Description  
Locks on the focus when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.  
Select this option when the distance between the camera and the  
subject remains fairly consistent.  
A Single AF  
(default setting)  
The camera focuses continuously during movie recording.  
Suitable for shooting when the distance between the camera and  
subject changes. The operation sound when the camera focuses may  
be recorded. Setting to Single AF is recommended if the sound is  
noticeable.  
B Full-time AF  
Wind Noise Reduction  
Set to D(Movie) MdMD(Movie menu) (A149) MWind noise reduction  
Set whether or not to reduce wind noise during movie recording.  
Option  
Description  
Records while minimizing the noise of wind blowing on the  
camera’s built-in microphone. Suitable for recording in strong  
winds. During playback, not only wind noise, but other sounds may  
also become difficult to hear.  
Y On  
k Off  
(default setting)  
Wind noise is not reduced.  
When the wind noise reduction setting is enabled, the current setting is displayed  
during shooting (A6). When Off is selected, an icon for the current setting is not  
displayed.  
B Note on Wind Noise Reduction  
When the external microphone (A146) is used for shooting, Wind noise reduction is not available.  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Movie Playback  
In full-frame playback mode (A30), movies can be  
recognized by a movie options icon (A148). To play a  
movie, press the kbutton.  
15/11/2010 15:30  
0010.MOV  
10m16s  
Use the zoom control gor fduring playback to adjust  
the volume. Playback controls appear at the top of the  
monitor. Press the rotary multi selector Jor Kto  
choose a playback control, then press the kbutton to  
perform the selected operation.  
Pausing  
The following operations are available.  
7m42s  
During  
Volume  
playback  
indicator  
To  
Rewind  
Use  
Description  
A
Rewind the movie while the kbutton is pressed down.  
Advance  
Pause  
End  
B
E
G
Advance the movie while the kbutton is pressed down.  
The following operations can be performed with the playback  
controls at the top of the monitor while playback is paused.  
Rewind the movie by one frame. Hold down the k  
button to rewind continuously.*  
C
Advance the movie by one frame. Hold down the k  
button to advance continuously.*  
D
Extract and save only the required parts of the movie  
I
Save the extracted frame from a movie as a still picture  
H
F
Resume playback.  
Return to full-frame playback mode.  
*
The movie can also be advanced or rewound by one frame by rotating the rotary multi selector or  
command dial.  
B Note on Movie Playback  
Movies shot with cameras other than COOLPIX P7000 cannot be played back.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Movie Playback  
Editing Movies  
You can extract only the required parts of a movie and save as a separate file.  
1
2
Play back and pause the movie that you want to edit (A151).  
Use the rotary multi selector J or K to choose  
I on the playback control and press the k  
button.  
The movie editing screen is displayed.  
7m42s  
3
4
Press H or I to choose J (Choose start  
point) on the editing playback control.  
Choose start point  
Rotate the rotary multi selector or press J or K to  
move the start point at the left end to the start position  
of the required section.  
8m48s  
To cancel, press H or I to choose L (Back) and press  
the k button.  
Press H or I to choose K (Choose end  
point).  
Choose end point  
Rotate the rotary multi selector or press J or K to  
move the end point at the right end to the end position  
of the required section.  
5m52s  
To check the playback of the movie in the specified  
range before saving it, choose c (Preview) and press  
the k button. During preview playback, the volume can be adjusted with the zoom  
control g/f. Use the rotary multi selector to fast forward or rewind. To stop the  
preview playback, press the k button.  
5
6
After finishing the settings, press H or I to choose m (Save) and press  
the k button.  
Choose Yes and press the k button.  
Save OK?  
The edited movie is saved.  
To cancel the saving, choose No.  
Yes  
No  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Movie Playback  
B Notes on Editing Movies  
Once a movie is created through editing, it cannot be used again for extracting a movie. To extract  
another range, select and edit the original movie.  
Because the edited movies are extracted in 1-second units, they may vary slightly from the set start  
point and end point. Sections shorter than two seconds cannot be extracted.  
Editing functions are not available when there is not enough free space in the internal memory or  
on the memory card.  
D More Information  
See “File and Folder Names” (A203) for more information.  
Saving a Frame from a Movie as a Still Picture  
A screen from a shot movie can be extracted and saved as a still picture.  
Pause a movie and display the screen to be extracted  
(A151).  
Choose H on the playback control with the rotary  
multi selector Jor Kand press the kbutton.  
7m42s  
When the confirmation dialog is displayed, choose Yes  
and press the kbutton to save. To cancel the saving,  
choose No.  
The still picture is saved with Normal as the image  
quality. The image size is determined by the type  
(resolution) (A148) of the original movie.  
- x HD 720p (1280×720) R 1280×720  
- y VGA (640×480) S 640×480  
Copy this frame as a still image?  
Yes  
No  
- z QVGA (320×240) s 320×240  
When the picture is saved with s 320×240, it is displayed with a gray frame  
during playback.  
Deleting Unnecessary Movies  
Press the lbutton when a movie is selected in full-frame  
playback mode (A30) or thumbnail playback mode  
(A116) to display the confirmation dialog for deletion.  
Select Yes and press the kbutton to delete the movie,  
or select No to exit without deleting the movie.  
Erase 1 image?  
Yes  
No  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Connecting to Televisions, Computers and Printers  
Connecting to a TV  
Connect the camera to a television to play back pictures on the television.  
If your television is equipped with an HDMI connector, you can connect it to the  
camera with a commercially available HDMI cable to enjoy recorded movies in the  
high-definition quality.  
1
Turn off the camera.  
2
Connect the camera to the TV.  
When connecting using the supplied audio/video cable  
Connect the yellow plug to the video-in jack on the TV, and the red and white plugs to  
the audio-in jacks.  
Yellow White Red  
When connecting using a commercially available HDMI cable  
Connect the plug to the HDMI jack on the TV.  
To the HDMI jack  
HDMI mini  
connector (Type C)  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Connecting to a TV  
3
4
Tune the television to the video channel.  
See the documentation provided with your television for details.  
Hold down the cbutton to turn on the  
camera.  
The camera enters playback mode, and the recorded  
pictures are displayed on the television.  
While the camera is connected to the TV, the monitor  
remains off.  
B Notes on Connecting an HDMI Cable  
An HDMI cable is not supplied. Use a commercially available HDMI cable to connect the camera to  
a TV. The output terminal on this camera is a HDMI Mini Connector (Type C). When purchasing an  
HDMI cable, be sure that the device end of the cable is a HDMI Mini Connector.  
To enjoy playback in high-definition quality when the camera is connected to a television that has  
an HDMI connector, we recommend shooting still pictures with Image size set to C 2048×1536  
or higher, and recording movies with Movie options set to x HD 720p (1280×720).  
B Notes on Connecting the Audio/Video Cable  
When connecting the cable, be sure that the connector is oriented correctly. Do not force the  
connector into the camera. When disconnecting the cable, do not pull the connector at an angle.  
Do not connect an audio/video cable and HDMI cable to the camera at the same time.  
Do not connect an HDMI cable and USB cable to the camera at the same time.  
B When Nothing Appears on the TV  
Make sure that TV settings (A183) in the setup menu (A167) is appropriate for your television.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a Computer  
Use the supplied USB cable to connect the camera to a computer and copy  
(transfer) images to the computer.  
Before Connecting the Camera  
Install the Software  
Use the supplied ViewNX 2 CD and install the following software on the computer.  
ViewNX 2: Use the image transfer feature “Nikon Transfer 2” to save images that  
were captured with the camera on the computer. Saved images can be viewed  
and printed. Image and movie editing features are also supported.  
Panorama Maker 5: This software can join a series of images to create a single  
panorama image.  
For more information on installing the software, refer to the Quick Start Guide.  
Compatible Operating Systems  
Windows  
Windows 7 Home Basic/Home Premium/Professional/Enterprise/Ultimate,  
Windows Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/Business/Enterprise/Ultimate (Service  
Pack 2), or Windows XP Home Edition/Professional (Service Pack 3)  
Macintosh  
Mac OS X (version 10.4.11, 10.5.8, 10.6.4)  
For information on the requirements for playing back high-definition movies, refer  
to “System Requirements” in the ViewNX 2 help information (A160).  
Refer to the Nikon website for the latest information on operating system  
compatibility.  
B Notes on Power Source  
When connecting the camera to a computer to transfer images, use a fully charged battery to  
prevent the camera from turning off unexpectedly.  
If the AC Adapter EH-5a and the Power Connector EP-5A (available separately) are used, COOLPIX  
P7000 can be powered from an electrical outlet. Do not, under any circumstances, use an AC  
Adapter other than the EH-5a or a Power Connector other than the EP-5A.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Connecting to a Computer  
Transferring Images from a Camera to a Computer  
1
2
3
Start the computer to which ViewNX 2 was installed.  
Be sure that the camera is off.  
Connect the camera to the computer using the supplied USB cable.  
Be sure that connectors are properly oriented. Do not attempt to insert connectors at an  
angle, and do not use force when connecting or disconnecting the USB cable.  
4
Turn on the camera.  
The power-on lamp lights. The camera monitor remains  
off.  
B Connecting the USB Cable  
The connection may not be recognized if the camera is connected to the computer via a USB hub.  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connecting to a Computer  
5
Start the ViewNX 2 image transfer feature “Nikon Transfer 2” installed  
on the computer.  
Windows 7  
When the Devices and Printers KP7000 screen is displayed, click Change  
program under Import pictures and videos. Select Import File using Nikon  
Transfer 2 in the Change program dialog and click OK.  
Double-click Import File on the Devices and Printers KP7000 screen.  
Windows Vista  
When the AutoPlay dialog is displayed, click Import File using Nikon Transfer 2.  
Windows XP  
When the action selection dialog is displayed, select Nikon Transfer 2 Import File  
and click OK.  
Mac OS X  
Nikon Transfer 2 will start automatically when the camera is connected to the  
computer if Yes was selected in the Auto-Launch setting dialog when Nikon Transfer  
2 was first installed.  
If charge for the battery inserted into the camera is low, the computer may not  
recognize the camera. If the camera is not recognized, images will not be transferred.  
If there are a large number of images on the memory card, it may take some time for  
Nikon Transfer 2 to start.  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connecting to a Computer  
6
Confirm that the source device is displayed in the transfer options  
Source panel and click Start Transfer.  
Source device  
Start Transfer button  
Any images that have not been transferred to the computer will be transferred (default  
setting of ViewNX 2).  
ViewNX 2 starts automatically when the transfer is complete (default setting of ViewNX  
2). Transferred images can be viewed.  
For more information on using ViewNX 2, refer to the ViewNX 2 help information (A160).  
Disconnecting the Camera  
Do not turn off the camera or disconnect the camera from the computer during  
transfer.  
When transfer is complete, turn off the camera and disconnect the USB cable.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a Computer  
C Transferring Images Using a Computers Card Slot or a Commercially-  
available Card Reader  
When the memory card is inserted into a computer’s card slot or into a commercially-available card  
reader, the images can be transferred using “Nikon Transfer 2, the image transfer feature of ViewNX 2.  
Make sure that the memory card being used is supported by the card reader or other card reading  
device.  
To transfer images, insert the memory card into the card reader or card slot and follow the  
procedure from step 5 (A158).  
To transfer images saved in the camera’s internal memory, the images must first be copied to a  
memory card using the camera (A131).  
D Starting ViewNX 2 or Nikon Transfer 2 Manually  
Windows  
Choose Start menu All Programs ViewNX 2 ViewNX 2.  
Double-clicking the ViewNX 2 shortcut icon on the desktop will also start ViewNX 2.  
Mac OS X  
Open the Applications folder, open the Nikon Software ViewNX 2 folders in that order, and  
then double-click the ViewNX 2 icon. Clicking the ViewNX 2 icon on the Dock will also start ViewNX  
2.  
Click Transfer in the ViewNX 2 screen to start Nikon Transfer 2.  
D Viewing ViewNX 2 Help Information  
For more information on ViewNX 2 or Nikon Transfer 2, start ViewNX 2 or Nikon Transfer 2 and select  
ViewNX 2 Help from the Help menu.  
D Panorama Creation with Panorama Maker 5  
Use a series of images captured in Panorama assist scene mode (A55) to create a single  
panorama photo with Panorama Maker 5.  
Panorama Maker 5 can be installed on a computer using the supplied ViewNX 2 CD.  
After installation is complete, follow the procedure described below to start Panorama Maker 5.  
Windows  
Choose Start menu All Programs ArcSoft Panorama Maker 5 Panorama Maker 5.  
Mac OS X  
Open Applications and double-click the Panorama Maker 5 icon.  
For more information on using Panorama Maker 5, refer to the on-screen instructions and help  
information contained in Panorama Maker 5.  
D Image File Names and Folder Names  
See “File and Folder Names” (A203) for more information.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connecting to a Printer  
Users of PictBridge-compatible (A220) printers can connect the camera directly  
to the printer and print pictures without using a computer. The steps for printing  
are as follows.  
Take the pictures  
Choose the pictures for printing  
using the print set option  
(Print set: A123)  
Connect the camera to the printer (A162)  
Print pictures one at a time  
Print multiple pictures (A164)  
Turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable  
B Notes on Power Source  
When connecting the camera to a printer, use a fully charged battery to prevent the camera from  
turning off unexpectedly.  
If the AC Adapter EH-5a and the Power Connector EP-5A (available separately) are used, COOLPIX  
P7000 can be powered from an electrical outlet. Do not, under any circumstances, use an AC  
Adapter other than the EH-5a or a Power Connector other than the EP-5A.  
D Printing Pictures  
In addition to printing pictures transferred to a computer and printing pictures with a direct camera-  
to-printer connection, the following options are also available for printing pictures recorded on the  
memory card:  
Insert a memory card into a DPOF-compatible printer’s card slot.  
Take a memory card to a digital photo lab.  
For printing using these methods, specify the pictures and the number of prints each using the  
Print set (A123) option in the playback menu.  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connecting to a Printer  
Connecting the Camera and Printer  
1
Turn off the camera.  
2
3
Turn on the printer.  
Check the printer settings.  
Connect the camera to the printer using the supplied USB cable.  
Be sure that the connector is oriented correctly. When disconnecting the cable, do not  
pull the connector at an angle.  
4
Turn on the camera.  
When connected correctly, the PictBridge startup  
screen (1) is displayed in the camera monitor. Then the  
Print selection screen (2) is displayed.  
1
2
Print selection  
15/11  
2010  
NO. 32  
32  
D More Information  
See “Printing Images of Size 1:1” (A72) for more information.  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connecting to a Printer  
Printing Pictures One at a Time  
After connecting the camera to the printer correctly (A162), print pictures by  
following the procedure below.  
1
Use the rotary multi selector to choose the  
picture to be printed and press the kbutton.  
Print selection  
15/11  
2010  
Pictures can also be chosen by rotating the command  
dial.  
NO. 32  
32  
Rotate the zoom control to f(h) to display 12  
thumbnails, or to g(i) to switch back to full-frame  
playback.  
2
3
4
5
Choose Copies and press the kbutton.  
PictBridge  
Start print  
Copies  
Paper size  
Choose the number of copies (up to nine) and  
press the kbutton.  
Copies  
4
Choose Paper size and press the kbutton.  
PictBridge  
Start print  
Copies  
Paper size  
Choose the desired paper size and press the  
kbutton.  
Paper size  
Default  
3.5×5 in.  
5×7 in.  
100×150 mm  
4×6 in.  
To specify the paper size using the printer settings,  
choose Default in the paper size menu.  
10 in.  
Letter  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connecting to a Printer  
6
Choose Start print and press the kbutton.  
PictBridge  
Start print  
Copies  
Paper size  
7
Printing starts.  
The monitor display returns to that shown in step 1  
when printing is complete.  
Printing  
002 / 004  
To cancel before all copies have been printed, press the  
kbutton.  
Cancel  
Current print/total  
number of prints  
Printing Multiple Pictures  
After connecting the camera to the printer correctly (A162), print pictures by  
following the procedure below.  
1
When the Print selection screen is displayed,  
press the dbutton.  
The Print menu is displayed.  
2
Use the rotary multi selector to choose Paper  
size and press the kbutton.  
Print menu  
Print selection  
Print all images  
DPOF printing  
Paper size  
To exit the print menu, press the dbutton.  
3
Choose the desired paper size and press the  
kbutton.  
Paper size  
Default  
3.5×5 in.  
5×7 in.  
100×150 mm  
4×6 in.  
To specify the paper size using the printer settings,  
choose Default in the paper size menu.  
10 in.  
Letter  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connecting to a Printer  
4
Choose Print selection, Print all images or  
DPOF printing and press the kbutton.  
Print menu  
Print selection  
Print all images  
DPOF printing  
Paper size  
Print selection  
Choose the pictures (up to a maximum of 99) and  
number of copies (up to nine per picture).  
10  
Print selection  
Press the rotary multi selector Jor Kto  
choose the pictures, and press Hor Ito set  
the number of copies for each.  
1
1
3
Pictures can also be chosen by rotating the  
command dial.  
Pictures selected for printing can be  
recognized by the check mark icon and the  
Back  
numeral indicating the number of copies to be printed. A check mark is not  
displayed with pictures for which no copies have been specified and these  
pictures are not printed.  
Rotate the zoom control to g(i) to switch to full-frame playback, or f(h)  
to switch to 12 thumbnails display.  
Press the kbutton when setting is complete.  
When the menu shown on the right is  
displayed, choose Start print and press the k  
Print selection  
button to start printing.  
Choose Cancel and press the kbutton to  
010 prints  
return to the print menu.  
Start print  
Cancel  
Print all images  
All pictures stored on the internal memory or  
memory card are printed one at a time.  
Print all images  
When the menu shown on the right is  
displayed, choose Start print and press the k  
button to start printing.  
018 prints  
Choose Cancel and press the kbutton to  
return to the print menu.  
Start print  
Cancel  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a Printer  
DPOF printing  
Pictures for which a print order was created in  
Print set option (A123) can be printed.  
DPOF printing  
010 prints  
When the menu shown on the right is  
displayed, choose Start print and press the k  
button to start printing.  
Start print  
View images  
Cancel  
Choose Cancel and press the kbutton to  
return to the print menu.  
To view the current print order, choose View  
images and press the kbutton. To print  
pictures, press the kbutton again.  
10  
View images  
Back  
5
Printing starts.  
The monitor display returns to that shown in step 2  
when printing is complete.  
Printing  
002 / 004  
To cancel before all copies have been printed, press the  
kbutton.  
Cancel  
Current print/total  
number of prints  
C Paper Size  
The camera supports the following paper sizes: Default (the default paper size for the current  
printer), 3.5×5 in., 5×7 in., 100×150 mm, 4×6 in., 8×10 in., Letter, A3, and A4. Only sizes  
supported by the current printer are displayed.  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Camera Setup  
Setup Menu  
The setup menu contains the following options.  
Welcome screen  
Choose whether or not to display the welcome screen on the monitor when the camera is  
turned on.  
Date  
Set camera clock and choose home and destination time zones.  
Monitor settings  
Set the picture display after shooting, the screen brightness, and the display options when  
the monitor is turned on.  
Date imprint  
Imprint date and time of recording on pictures.  
Vibration reduction  
Set the vibration reduction for taking still pictures and movies.  
Motion detection  
Enable motion detection to reduce the effects of camera shake and subject movement  
when shooting still pictures.  
AF assist  
Enable or disable AF-assist illumination.  
Red-eye reduction  
Choose the red-eye reduction method when the flash mode is auto with red-eye  
reduction.  
Digital zoom  
Enable or disable the digital zoom.  
Zoom speed  
Set the zoom operation speed.  
Sound settings  
Adjust sound settings.  
Record orientation  
Set whether or not to record the orientation data with the picture when shooting.  
Auto off  
Set the time before the camera enters standby mode to save power.  
Format memory/Format card  
Format the internal memory or memory card.  
Language  
Choose the language used by the camera monitor display.  
TV settings  
Adjust the settings for connecting to a TV.  
Built-in ND filter  
Set whether or not to use the camera’s built-in ND filter to reduce the light when the  
shooting mode is A, B, C, D, E, F, Nor O(low noise night).  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Setup Menu  
AE/AF lock button  
Choose the function to be performed when the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.  
Fn button  
Choose the function to be performed when the shutter-release button is pressed while  
pressing the wbutton.  
Av/Tv button  
Choose the function to be performed when the Av/Tv button is pressed.  
Customize My Menu  
Register frequently used menu items in My Menu.  
Reset file numbering  
Reset the file numbering.  
Blink warning  
Choose whether or not to detect blinking eyes when shooting pictures using face  
priority.  
Reset all  
Restore camera settings to default values.  
Firmware version  
Display the camera firmware version.  
Displaying the Setup Menu  
Choose the z(Setup) tab in the menu screen.  
1
Press the dbutton to display the  
menu screen.  
Shooting menu  
Picture Control  
Custom Picture Control  
Metering  
Continuous  
Autofocus mode  
Flash exp. comp.  
Noise reduction filter  
2
Press Jon the rotary multi selector.  
Shooting menu  
Picture Control  
Custom Picture Control  
Metering  
The tabs can now be selected.  
Continuous  
Autofocus mode  
Flash exp. comp.  
Noise reduction filter  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setup Menu  
3
4
Press Hor Ito select the ztab.  
Set up  
Welcome screen  
Date  
Monitor settings  
Date imprint  
Vibration reduction  
Motion detection  
AF assist  
Press Kor the kbutton.  
Set up  
Welcome screen  
Date  
Monitor settings  
Date imprint  
Vibration reduction  
Motion detection  
AF assist  
The setup menu items can now be selected.  
Use the rotary multi selector to select items and set  
functions on menus (A12).  
To exit the setup menu, press the dbutton or press J  
and switch to another tab.  
Welcome Screen  
Press the dbutton Mz(Setup menu) (A168) MWelcome screen  
Choose whether or not to display the welcome screen on the monitor when the  
camera is turned on.  
None (default setting)  
Displays the shooting or playback screen without displaying the welcome screen.  
COOLPIX  
Displays the welcome screen before displaying the shooting or playback screen.  
Select an image  
Select a picture that you have shot to display as the welcome screen. Display the  
picture selection screen, choose a picture (A128), and press the kbutton to  
register it.  
Because the selected picture is stored in the camera, the picture appears in the  
welcome screen even if the original picture is deleted.  
NRW (RAW) images cannot be selected.  
Pictures shot with Image size (A70) of I 3648×2432, z 3584×2016 and  
H 2732736 cannot be selected.  
Pictures reduced to 160×120 or smaller using Small picture editing (A137) or  
cropping (A145) cannot be selected.  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setup Menu  
Date  
Press the dbutton Mz(Setup menu) (A168) MDate  
Set the camera’s internal clock.  
Date  
Set the camera clock to the current date and time.  
Use the rotary multi selector to set the date and time.  
DMY (date display order)  
Choose an item: Press Kor J(selected in the  
following order: D (day) M (month) Y (year) ➝  
hour minute DMY (date display order)).  
Set the contents: Rotate the rotary multi selector, or  
press Hor I.  
Date  
D
M
Y
15  
11  
2010  
15  
10  
Finish setting: Finally, choose DMY, and apply the  
selection by pressing the kbutton or K(A21).  
Edit  
Time zone  
w (home time zone) can be specified and daylight saving can be enabled or  
disabled.  
When x (travel destination) is registered, the time difference (A172) from the w  
(home time zone) is automatically calculated and the local date and time are  
recorded. Useful when traveling.  
Setting the Travel Destination Time Zone  
1
Use the rotary multi selector to choose Time  
zone and press the kbutton.  
Date  
15/11/2010  
15:30  
The Time zone screen is displayed.  
Date  
Time zone  
2
Choose x Travel destination and press the  
kbutton.  
Time zone  
15/11/2010  
15:30  
The date and time displayed on the monitor change  
according to the region currently selected.  
London, Casablanca  
Home time zone  
Travel destination  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setup Menu  
3
4
Press K.  
Time zone  
15/11/2010  
15:30  
The time zone selection screen is displayed.  
London, Casablanca  
Home time zone  
Travel destination  
Press Jor Kto choose the travel destination  
(Time zone).  
Time difference  
The time difference between home and the travel  
destination is displayed.  
10:30  
EST:  
New York  
Toronto  
Lima  
-5:00  
When using the camera in an area where daylight  
saving time is in effect, turn on the daylight saving  
setting with H. When set to on, the W icon is displayed  
and the clock advances by one hour. To turn off, press  
I.  
Back  
Time zone  
Press the kbutton to register the travel destination  
time zone.  
15/11/2010  
10:30  
While the travel destination time zone is selected, the  
Z icon is displayed on the monitor when the camera is  
in shooting mode.  
EST:New York  
Toronto, Lima  
Home time zone  
Travel destination  
B The Clock Battery  
The camera’s internal clock uses a different battery from the camera’s battery. The clock battery  
charges when the main battery is installed or the AC adapter is connected, and provides several days  
of clock battery power after about ten hours of charging.  
C w (Home time zone)  
To switch to the home time zone, choose w Home time zone in step 2 and press the kbutton.  
To change the home time zone, choose w Home time zone in step 2 and perform the same  
procedure as for x Travel destination to set the home time zone.  
C Daylight Saving Time  
When daylight saving time starts or ends, turn on or off the daylight saving time option from the time  
zone selection screen displayed in step 4.  
D Imprinting the Date on Pictures while Shooting  
After setting the date and time, set the Date imprint setting in the setup menu (A174). Once Date  
imprint is set, the shooting date and time can be imprinted on the pictures.  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setup Menu  
D Time Zones  
The camera supports the time zones listed below.  
For time differences not listed below, set the camera clock using Date.  
UTC +/-  
-11  
Location  
Midway, Samoa  
UTC +/-  
+1  
Location  
Madrid, Paris, Berlin  
Athens, Helsinki, Ankara  
-10  
Hawaii, Tahiti  
+2  
Moscow, Nairobi, Riyadh,  
Kuwait, Manama  
-9  
Alaska, Anchorage  
+3  
PST (PDT): Los Angeles,  
Seattle, Vancouver  
-8  
-7  
-6  
+4  
+5  
Abu Dhabi, Dubai  
Islamabad, Karachi  
New Delhi  
MST (MDT): Denver, Phoenix  
CST (CDT): Chicago,  
Houston, Mexico City  
+5.5  
EST (EDT): New York,  
Toronto, Lima  
-5  
-4.5  
-4  
+6  
+7  
+8  
Colombo, Dhaka  
Bangkok, Jakarta  
Caracas  
Beijing, Hong Kong,  
Singapore  
Manaus  
-3  
-2  
-1  
0
Buenos Aires, Sao Paulo  
Fernando de Noronha  
Azores  
+9  
Tokyo, Seoul  
+10  
+11  
+12  
Sydney, Guam  
New Caledonia  
Auckland, Fiji  
London, Casablanca  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setup Menu  
Monitor Settings  
Press the dbutton Mz(Setup menu) (A168) MMonitor settings  
Change the settings for the options below.  
Image review  
On (default setting): Picture is displayed on the monitor immediately after it is  
taken and the monitor display returns to shooting mode.  
Off: Picture is not displayed after it is taken.  
Zoom in on active focus point: Picture is displayed on the monitor immediately  
after it is taken and the monitor display returns to the shooting mode. An  
enlarged image of the focused section is displayed in the area where focusing  
is performed.  
Brightness  
Choose from five settings to select the monitor brightness. The default setting is 3.  
Photo info  
Choose the display options that are displayed on the monitor during shooting.  
Separate display options can be selected for when the monitor display (A14) is set  
to Show info and when it is set to Hide info. In the default setting, all options are  
hidden.  
To select show or hide, choose an option with the rotary multi selector, and then  
press the kbutton to turn the check box on wor off.  
After finishing the setting, choose Confirm and press the kbutton.  
X Virtual horizon  
Y View/hide histograms  
Z View/hide framing grid  
1/250  
F5.6  
1342  
1/250  
F5.6  
1342  
1/250  
F5.6  
1342  
Display the virtual horizon  
for checking whether the  
camera is horizontal.  
When the camera is  
horizontal or vertical, the  
horizontal line on the  
virtual horizon display  
turns green.  
Display a graph that shows  
Display a boxed guide for  
the brightness distribution in framing.  
the picture. The horizontal  
axis corresponds to pixel  
brightness, with dark tones to  
the left and bright tones to  
the right. The vertical axis  
shows the number of pixels.  
B Notes on Monitor Display Settings  
The display options are not displayed in auto mode, scene mode or low noise night mode. Only  
the grid is displayed in movie mode.  
In shooting modes  
the or  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E
,
F
and  
N
,
Photo info in the setup menu settings cannot be set. Select  
E
,
F
N
tab and set Photo info in the specialized menus for  
E
,
F
and N(A13, 112).  
173  
         
Setup Menu  
Date Imprint  
Press the dbutton Mz(Setup menu) (A168) MDate imprint  
The shooting date and time can be imprinted on  
pictures at the time of shooting. This information can be  
printed even from printers that do not support printing  
of the date and time (A125).  
15/11/2010  
Date  
The date is imprinted on pictures.  
Date and time  
The date and time are imprinted on pictures.  
Off (default setting)  
The date and time are not imprinted on pictures.  
At settings other than Off, the icon for the current setting is displayed on the  
monitor (A6).  
B Notes on Date Imprint  
Imprinted dates cannot be deleted from the image, nor can dates be imprinted after the picture  
has been taken.  
Dates cannot be imprinted in the following situations.  
-
-
-
-
-
When Sports, Museum or Panorama assist is selected for scene mode  
When Continuous, BSS or Continuous flash is selected for the Continuous setting (A99)  
When Auto bracketing (A80) is used  
During movie recording  
When NRW (RAW), NRW (RAW) + Fine, NRW (RAW) + Normal or NRW (RAW) + Basic is  
selected for Image quality (A68)  
Dates imprinted with an Image size (A70) setting of f 640×480 may be difficult to read. Set  
the Image size to J 1024×768 or larger.  
The date is recorded using the format selected in the setup menu’s Date option (A20, 170).  
C Date imprint and Print set  
When printing from DPOF-compatible printers which support printing of shooting date and photo  
information, the date and information can be printed on pictures without the date and time being  
imprinted on them with Date imprint, using options in the Print set menu (A123).  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setup Menu  
Vibration Reduction  
Press the dbutton Mz(Setup menu) (A168) MVibration reduction  
Set the vibration reduction for taking still pictures and movies. Use to correct blur,  
which is caused by the slight hand movements known as camera shake that  
commonly occur when shooting at the telephoto zoom position or at slow shutter  
speeds.  
When the camera is stabilized for still picture shooting with a tripod, set vibration  
reduction to Off.  
On (default setting)  
Compensates for camera shake. The camera automatically detects the panning  
direction and only corrects for vibration caused by camera shake.  
When the camera is panned horizontally, for example, vibration reduction only  
reduces vertical shake. If the camera is panned vertically, vibration reduction only  
compensates for horizontal shake.  
Off  
Vibration reduction is disabled.  
When vibration reduction is enabled, the current setting is displayed during  
shooting (A6, 25). Nothing is displayed when the setting is Off.  
B Notes on Vibration Reduction  
After the power is turned on or the camera enters shooting mode from playback mode, wait until  
the display stabilizes before shooting.  
Due to the characteristics of the vibration reduction function, images displayed on the monitor  
immediately after shooting may appear blurry.  
Vibration reduction may be unable to completely eliminate the effects of camera shake in some  
situations.  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setup Menu  
Motion Detection  
Press the dbutton Mz(Setup menu) (A168) MMotion detection  
Enable motion detection to reduce the effects of camera shake and subject  
movement when shooting still pictures.  
Auto  
When the camera detects the movement of the subject or camera shake, the ISO  
sensitivity is raised and the shutter speed is increased to reduce their effects.  
However, motion detection does not function in the following situations.  
When the fill flash fires  
In the following scene modes: Sports, Night portrait, Dusk/dawn, Night  
landscape, Museum, Fireworks show and Backlighting  
When shooting mode is A, B, C, D, E, F, Nor O(low noise night)  
When the smile timer is set  
When Subject tracking is selected for AF area mode  
Off (default setting)  
Motion detection is not applied.  
When motion detection is enabled, the current setting is displayed during shooting  
(A6).  
The motion detection icon lights in green when the camera detects any vibration  
and increases the shutter speed. Nothing is displayed when the setting is Off.  
B Notes on Motion Detection  
Motion detection may be unable to completely reduce effects of camera shake and subject  
movement in some situations.  
Motion detection may not function if the subject exhibits significant movement or is too dark.  
The pictures taken may become grainy.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
176  
   
Setup Menu  
AF Assist  
Press the dbutton Mz(Setup menu) (A168) MAF assist  
Enable or disable the AF-assist illumination that assists the autofocus when the  
lighting is poor.  
Auto (default setting)  
AF-assist illumination turns on automatically when the subject is poorly lit. The  
illuminator has a range of about 6.5 m (21 ft.) at the maximum wide-angle position  
and about 5.5 m (18 ft.) at the maximum telephoto position. However, for some  
focus areas and scene modes, AF-assist illumination does not turn on even if Auto  
is set.  
Off  
Disable the function. The camera may be difficult to focus if lighting is poor.  
B Note on the AF assist Illuminator  
In shooting modes E, Fand N, AF assist in the setup menu settings cannot be set.  
Select the E, For Ntab and set AF assist in the specialized menus for E, Fand N(A13,  
Red-eye Reduction  
Press the dbutton Mz(Setup menu) (A168) MRed-eye reduction  
Choose the red-eye reduction method when the flash mode (A32) is V(Auto  
with red-eye reduction).  
Pre-flash on (default setting)  
The flash repeatedly fires pre-flashes at low intensity before the main flash to reduce  
the red-eye effect, and it then performs the red-eye reduction process using picture  
compensation.  
Note that there is a slight lag between the shutter-release button being pressed and  
the picture being shot.  
Pre-flash off  
Pre-flashes do not fire. The shutter is released immediately when the shutter-release  
button is fully pressed, and the red-eye reduction process is performed using picture  
compensation.  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Setup Menu  
Digital Zoom  
Press the dbutton Mz(Setup menu) (A168) MDigital zoom  
Enable or disable the digital zoom.  
On (default setting)  
When the camera is zoomed in to the maximum optical zoom position, rotating and  
holding the zoom control at g(i) triggers the digital zoom (A27).  
Crop  
Limit zoom magnification up to the position of V (except when recording a movie).  
Also limit the digital zoom to the range at which image quality of the shot still picture  
does not deteriorate.  
The digital zoom is not available when Image size is M 3648×2736, E 3264×2448,  
I 3648×2432, z 3584×2016 or H 2732736.  
Off  
The digital zoom is not activated (except when recording a movie).  
B Notes on Digital Zoom  
When the digital zoom is in effect, AF area mode is set to Center (spot) (A84).  
Digital zoom cannot be used in the following situations.  
-
-
-
-
-
When the focus mode (A40) is set to E (manual focus)  
When Subject tracking is selected for AF area mode (A84)  
When Smile timer is set  
When Scene auto selector, Portrait or Night portrait is selected in scene mode  
When NRW (RAW), NRW (RAW) + Fine, NRW (RAW) + Normal or NRW (RAW) + Basic is  
selected for Image quality (A68)  
-
-
When Multi-shot 16 is selected for the Continuous (A99) setting  
When Wide-angle converter (A104) is set to On  
At magnifications of 1.2× to 1.8×, Metering is set to Center-weighted, and at magnifications of  
2.0× to 4.0×, it is set to Spot.  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setup Menu  
Zoom Speed  
Press the dbutton Mz(Setup menu) (A168) MZoom speed  
Set the zoom operation speed. Slow down the zoom speed to minimize the  
recording of the zoom operating noise during movie recording.  
Auto (default setting)  
During still picture shooting, operate the zoom at the Normal speed. During movie  
recording, operate the zoom at a lower speed than Normal to minimize the  
recording of the zoom operating noise. During still picture shooting, rotating the  
zoom control all the way in either direction adjusts the zoom quickly, while rotating  
the control partially adjusts the zoom slowly.  
Normal  
During both still picture shooting and movie recording, operate the zoom at the  
standard speed. During both still picture shooting and movie recording, rotating  
the zoom control all the way in either direction adjusts the zoom quickly, while  
rotating the control partially adjusts the zoom slowly.  
Quiet  
During both still picture shooting and movie recording, operate the zoom at a  
lower speed than Normal.  
The zoom speed setting is shown by an icon displayed on the monitor during  
shooting (A6). At settings other than Auto, the icon for the current setting is  
displayed on the monitor.  
Sound Settings  
Press the dbutton Mz(Setup menu) (A168) MSound settings  
Adjust the following sound settings.  
Button sound  
Turn the beep and start-up sounds On (default setting) or Off. The beep sounds  
once when the settings are completed successfully, twice when the camera  
focuses on the subject, and three times when an error is detected.  
Shutter sound  
Choose whether to set the shutter sound to On (default setting) or Off.  
Even when On is set, the shutter sound is not made during continuous shooting  
or movie recording.  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Setup Menu  
Record Orientation  
Press the dbutton Mz(Setup menu) (A168) MRecord orientation  
Set whether or not to record the orientation data with the picture when shooting.  
Auto (default setting)  
Record the orientation data with the picture when shooting. When the picture is  
played back, the recorded orientation data is used to automatically rotate the  
picture for display.  
The following three data orientation types for the camera can be recorded.  
Horizontal position  
Vertical position with  
the left side on top  
Vertical position with  
the right side on top  
Off  
The orientation data is not recorded. Pictures are always displayed in the horizontal  
position.  
The orientation data can be changed after shooting using Rotate image in the  
playback menu (A130).  
B Notes on Recording the Orientation Data  
In continuous or auto bracketing mode, all pictures are recorded with the same orientation data as  
the first picture.  
Correct orientation data may not be obtained for pictures recorded with the camera facing up or  
down.  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setup Menu  
Auto Off  
Press the d button M z (Setup menu) (A168) M Auto off  
If no operations are performed for a certain period while the camera is on, the  
monitor is turned off to save power and the camera enters standby mode (A19).  
In this menu, set the time before the camera enters standby mode.  
Choose from 30 s, 1 min (default setting), 5 min and 30 min.  
C When the Monitor Is Turned Off to Save Power  
The power-on lamp blinks in standby mode.  
The camera turns off when the standby mode continues for about three minutes.  
When the power-on lamp blinks, turn on the monitor again with one of the following operations.  
-
-
Press the power switch, shutter-release button or the c button.  
Rotate the mode dial.  
B Auto Off Setting  
In the following situations, the time taken for the camera to enter standby mode is fixed.  
When menus are displayed: three minutes  
When tone level information is displayed (shooting mode): three minutes  
During slideshow playback: maximum of 30 minutes  
When the AC adapter EH-5a is connected: 30 minutes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
181  
   
Setup Menu  
Format Memory/Format Card  
Press the dbutton Mz(Setup menu) (A168) MFormat memory/Format card  
Format the internal memory or a memory card.  
Formatting Internal Memory  
Format memory  
All images will  
be deleted! OK?  
To format the internal memory, remove the memory  
card from the camera. The Format memory option  
appears in the setup menu.  
Format  
No  
Formatting Memory Card  
Format card  
When the memory card is inserted in the camera, the  
All images will  
be deleted! OK?  
Format card option appears in the setup menu.  
Format  
No  
B Formatting Internal Memory and Memory card  
Formatting the internal memory or memory card permanently deletes all data. Be sure to  
transfer important pictures to a computer before formatting.  
Do not turn off the camera or open the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover during  
formatting.  
The first time you insert a memory card that has been used in another device into this camera, be  
sure to format it with this camera.  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setup Menu  
Language  
Press the dbutton Mz(Setup menu) (A168) MLanguage  
Choose one of 24 languages for displaying the camera menus and messages.  
Czech  
Italian  
Swedish  
Turkish  
Arabic  
Danish  
German  
Hungarian  
Dutch  
(default  
setting)  
Simplified  
Chinese  
Norwegian  
Polish  
Traditional  
Chinese  
Spanish  
Greek  
Portuguese  
Russian  
Japanese  
Korean  
Thai  
French  
Indonesian  
Finnish  
TV Settings  
Press the dbutton Mz(Setup menu) (A168) MTV settings  
Adjust the settings for connecting to a TV.  
Video mode  
Choose from NTSC and PAL.  
HDMI  
Choose a picture resolution for HDMI output from Auto (default setting), 480p,  
720p, or 1080i. When Auto is set, the output resolution that is best suited to the  
connected high-definition TV is selected automatically from 480p, 720p or 1080i.  
HDMI device control  
Choose whether or not to receive signals from a TV when a TV that conforms to the  
HDMI-CEC standard is connected with an HDMI cable.  
When set to On (default setting), the television remote control can be used to  
operate the camera during playback instead of the rotary multi selector or zoom  
control. Picture selection, movie playback and pause, and switching between full-  
frame playback and four thumbnails display can be performed.  
See your TV’s manual or other related documentation to check whether the TV  
supports the HDMI-CEC standard.  
D HDMI and HDMI-CEC  
“HDMI” is an abbreviation of High-Definition Multimedia Interface, which is one type of multimedia  
interface. “HDMI-CEC” is an abbreviation of HDMI-Consumer Electronics Control, which enables  
operations to be linked between compatible devices.  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Setup Menu  
Built-in ND Filter  
Press the dbutton Mz(Setup menu) (A168) MBuilt-in ND filter  
When the camera’s built-in ND filter is used, the amount of light that enters the  
camera while shooting can be reduced in three steps. Use in situations such as when  
overexposure results from the subject being too bright. Set whether or not to use the  
built-in ND filter to reduce the light in the following shooting modes.  
O(low noise night) mode  
A, B, Cand Dmodes (including E, Fand Nmodes)  
In shooting modes other than the above, the on/off setting of the built-in ND filter  
is controlled automatically according to the shooting mode and shooting  
conditions, regardless of Built-in ND filter setting.  
On  
Use the ND filter to reduce the light.  
Auto  
In mode O (low noise night) or A(Programmed auto), when the subject is too  
bright and the exposure range is exceeded, reduce the light automatically with the  
ND filter.  
In shooting modes B, Cor D, the ND filter is disabled.  
Off (default setting)  
The ND filter is not used.  
The setting for the built-in ND filter is shown by an icon displayed on the monitor  
during shooting (A6). Nothing is displayed when the setting is Off, A(auto),  
scene or movie mode.  
C Effects of the Built-in ND Filter  
Using the filter may enable the shooting of subjects that are too bright without overexposing the  
image. It can also be used in situations such as when you want to slow down the shutter speed at a  
low aperture value.  
For example, at a shutter speed of 1/2000 second with the correct exposure, if the ND filter is used to  
reduce the light in three steps, the speed can be changed to 1/250 second without changing the  
aperture value.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setup Menu  
AE/AF Lock Button  
Press the dbutton Mz(Setup menu) (A168) MAE/AF lock button  
Choose the function to be performed when the AE-L/AF-L button (A11) is  
pressed during still picture shooting.  
AE/AF lock (default setting)  
Lock both the focus and exposure when the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed while  
shooting.  
AE lock only  
Lock only the exposure when the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed while shooting.  
AF lock only  
Lock only the focus when the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed while shooting.  
The AE-L/AF-L button setting is displayed on the monitor during shooting (A6).  
B Notes on AE-L/AF-L Button Setting  
AE-L (exposure locking) cannot be used when the shooting mode is set to D.  
AF-L (focus locking) cannot be used when focus mode (A40) is set to E (manual focus).  
D More Information  
See “Focus Lock” (A29) for more information.  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setup Menu  
Fn Button  
Press the dbutton Mz(Setup menu) (A168) MFn button  
Choose the function to be performed when the shutter-release button is pressed  
while pressing the wbutton (A11).  
This can be used when A, B, C, D, E, For Nis chosen for shooting mode.  
Off (default setting)  
Shoot without changing the setting.  
NRW (RAW)/NORMAL (Image quality) (A68)  
When Fine, Normal or Basic is set, shoot with the NRW (RAW) setting. When  
NRW (RAW) is set, shoot with the Normal setting.  
The Image size is M 3648×2736.  
When NRW (RAW) + Fine, NRW (RAW) + Normal or NRW (RAW) + Basic is  
set, shoot without changing the setting.  
ISO sensitivity (A74)  
Shoot with ISO sensitivity set to Auto.  
White balance (A76)  
Shoot with White balance set to Auto.  
Cannot be used when Picture Control is set to Monochrome.  
Picture Control (A92)  
Shoot with Picture Control set to Standard.  
Active D-Lighting (A106)  
Shoot with Active D-Lighting set to Normal.  
Metering (A98)  
Shoot with Metering set to Spot.  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setup Menu  
Av/Tv Button  
Press the dbutton Mz(Setup menu) (A168) MAv/Tv button  
Choose the function to be performed when the Av/Tv button (A9) is pressed.  
Toggle Av/Tv selection (default setting)  
Switch the shutter speed or aperture value setting operation. Each time the Av/Tv  
button is pressed, the operation switches between the command dial and the  
rotary multi selector (A63, 64, 65).  
Available only when A, B, C, D, E, For Nis selected for shooting mode.  
Virtual horizon, View/hide histograms, View/hide framing grid  
Select whether to view or hide the virtual horizon, histogram or framing grid  
displays (A173) on the monitor during shooting.  
Built-in ND filter  
Change the built-in ND filter (A184) setting.  
Customize My Menu  
Press the dbutton Mz(Setup menu) (A168) MCustomize My Menu  
Register frequently used menu items in My Menu (maximum of six). My Menu is  
displayed when the quick menu dial is set to Iand the quick menu button is  
pressed, allowing settings to be quickly checked or changed (when shooting mode  
is set to A, B, C, D, E, For N).  
The following items can be registered.  
Picture Control (A92)  
Flash control (A105)  
Vibration reduction (A175)  
Custom Picture Control  
Noise reduction filter (A103) Digital zoom (A178)  
Format memory/Format card  
Metering (A98)  
Long exposure NR (A103)  
Continuous (A99)  
Distortion control (A104)  
Built-in ND filter (A184)  
Wide-angle converter  
Autofocus mode (A102)  
Flash exp. comp. (A102)  
- (no setting) (delete)*  
Active D-Lighting  
*
Choose to remove an item from My Menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
187  
       
Setup Menu  
Registering into My Menu  
1
Use the rotary multi selector to choose the  
menu item and press the kbutton.  
Customize My Menu  
Picture Control  
Active D-Lighting  
Distortion control  
Metering  
The menu item selection screen is displayed.  
Continuous  
Autofocus mode  
2
Choose the menu item to be registered and  
press the kbutton.  
Customize My Menu : 1  
Picture Control  
Custom Picture Control  
Metering  
The chosen menu item is switched.  
Continuous  
To finish the setting, press the rotary multi selector J.  
Autofocus mode  
Flash exp. comp.  
Flash control  
Reset File Numbering  
Press the dbutton Mz(Setup menu) (A168) MReset file numbering  
When Yes is selected, the sequential numbering of file numbers is reset (A203).  
After resetting, a new folder is created and the file number for the next image taken  
starts from “0001.”  
B Notes on Reset file numbering  
Reset file numbering cannot be used when scene mode is set to Panorama assist, or if Intvl  
timer shooting is chosen for Continuous when A, B, C, D, E, For Nshooting modes are  
used. For Panorama assist or Intvl timer shooting, a new folder is created, and file numbers are  
assigned automatically starting with “0001” (A203, 204).  
Reset file numbering cannot be applied when the folder number reaches 999 and there are  
images in the folder. Insert a new memory card, or format the internal memory/memory card  
(A182).  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setup Menu  
Blink Warning  
Press the dbutton Mz(Setup menu) (A168) MBlink warning  
Choose whether or not blinking eyes are detected when using face priority (A86)  
in the following shooting modes.  
Scene auto selector (A46), Portrait (A48) or Night portrait (A49) scene  
modes  
Shooting modes A, B, C, D, E, F, N, and O(low noise night) (when Face  
priority (A84) is selected for AF area mode)  
On  
When the camera detects that a human subject may have closed the eyes  
immediately after recognizing the face and shooting the subject, the Did  
someone blink? screen appears on the monitor.  
The face of the human subject that may have closed his/her eyes is framed by a  
yellow border. You can check the picture taken and determine if you need to take  
the picture again.  
Off (default setting)  
Blink warning does not take effect.  
B Note on Blink Warning  
When a setting other than Single is set for Continuous (A99), when Auto bracketing (A80) is  
set, when the tone level information (A82) is displayed automatically, or when Smile timer is set  
(A36), blink warning does not take effect.  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setup Menu  
Operating the Did someone blink? Screen  
The following operations can be performed when the  
Did someone blink?  
Did someone blink? screen is displayed.  
If no operations are performed for a few seconds, the  
screen automatically returns to the shooting mode  
screen.  
Exit  
Description  
To  
Use  
Zoom in to the face  
for which blinking  
was detected  
Rotate the zoom control to g(i).  
g(i)  
Return to full-frame  
playback  
Rotate the zoom control to f(h).  
f(h)  
When the camera detects that one or more human  
subjects have closed their eyes, press H, I, Jor K  
during playback zoom to display other faces.  
Can also be changed by rotating the rotary multi  
selector or the command dial.  
Select the face to be  
displayed  
Delete the picture  
taken  
Press the lbutton.  
l
k
Return to shooting  
mode  
Press the kbutton or the shutter-release button.  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setup Menu  
Reset All  
Press the dbutton Mz(Setup menu) (A168) MReset all  
When Reset is selected, the camera settings are restored to the default values.  
Pop-up Menu  
Option  
Default value  
Flash mode (A32)  
Auto  
Off  
Self-timer (A35)/Remote Control (A38)/Smile  
timer (A36)  
Focus mode (A40)  
Autofocus  
Auto  
AF area mode (A84)  
Shooting in the Scene Mode  
Option  
Default value  
Scene menu (A45)  
Scene auto selector  
Center  
Hue adjustment in Food mode (A53)  
Low Noise Night Menu  
Option  
Default value  
Metering (A59)  
Matrix  
Single  
0.0  
Continuous (A59)  
Flash exp. comp. (A59)  
Movie Menu  
Option  
Default value  
Autofocus mode (A150)  
Wind noise reduction (A150)  
Single AF  
Off  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setup Menu  
Quick Menu  
Option  
Default value  
Image quality (A68)  
Normal  
Image size (A70)  
M 3648×2736  
Movie options (A148)  
ISO sensitivity (A74)  
HD 720p (1280×720)  
Auto  
None  
Auto  
Off  
Minimum shutter speed (A74)  
White balance (A76)  
Auto bracketing (A80)  
Shooting Menu  
Option  
Default value  
Picture Control (A92)  
Metering (A98)  
Standard  
Matrix  
Continuous (A99)  
Single  
Intvl timer shooting (A100)  
Autofocus mode (A102)  
Flash exp. comp. (A102)  
Noise reduction filter (A103)  
Long exposure NR (A103)  
Distortion control (A104)  
Wide-angle converter (A104)  
Flash control (A105)  
Active D-Lighting (A106)  
Zoom memory (A107)  
30 s  
Single AF  
0.0  
Normal  
Auto  
Off  
None  
Auto  
Off  
All values are chosen.  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup Menu  
Setup Menu  
Option  
Default value  
Welcome screen (A169)  
Image review (A173)  
Brightness (A173)  
None  
On  
3
Monitor settings (A173)  
Date imprint (A174)  
Vibration reduction (A175)  
Motion detection (A176)  
AF assist (A177)  
Hide all items  
Off  
On  
Off  
Auto  
Red-eye reduction (A177)  
Digital zoom (A178)  
Zoom speed (A179)  
Button sound (A179)  
Shutter sound (A179)  
Record orientation (A180)  
Auto off (A181)  
Pre-flash on  
On  
Auto  
On  
On  
Auto  
1 min  
HDMI (A183)  
Auto  
HDMI device control (A183)  
Built-in ND filter (A184)  
AE/AF lock button (A185)  
Fn button (A186)  
On  
Off  
AE/AF lock  
Off  
Av/Tv button (A187)  
Toggle Av/Tv selection  
1: Picture Control  
2: Active D-Lighting  
3: Distortion control  
4: Metering  
Customize My Menu (A187)  
5: Continuous  
6: Autofocus mode  
Blink warning (A189)  
Off  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup Menu  
Others  
Option  
Default value  
Paper size (A163, 164)  
Default  
3 s  
Frame intvl for Slide show (A126)  
Choosing Reset all also clears the current file number (A203) in the memory.  
After resetting, numbering continues from the lowest number available in the  
internal memory or the memory card. If Reset all is performed after all pictures  
are deleted from the internal memory or memory card (A127), the file numbers  
for the next shot pictures start from 0001.  
The following settings remain unaffected even if Reset all is performed.  
Quick menu: Preset manual data for White balance (A79)  
Shooting menu: Custom Picture Control registration (A96)  
Setup menu: Date (A170), Language (A183) and Video mode (A183) in  
TV settings  
User settings that were saved for mode dial E, Fand Nare not reset to the  
default settings when Reset all is performed. To change these settings back to  
the default settings, use Reset user settings (A114).  
Firmware Version  
Press the dbutton Mz(Setup menu) (A168) MFirmware version  
Displays the current camera firmware version.  
COOLPIX P7000 Ver.X.X  
Back  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Caring for the Camera  
Caring for the Camera  
To ensure continued enjoyment of this Nikon product, observe the following  
precautions when using or storing the device.  
B Keep dry  
The device will be damaged if immersed in water or subjected to high humidity.  
B Do not drop  
The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shock or vibration.  
B Handle the lens and all moving parts with care  
Do not apply force to the lens, lens cover, monitor, memory card slot or battery chamber. These parts  
are easily damaged. Applying force to the lens cover could result in camera malfunction or damage  
to the lens. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury caused by broken glass  
and to prevent the liquid crystal from the display touching the skin or entering the eyes or mouth.  
B Do not point the lens at strong light sources for extended periods  
Avoid pointing the lens at the sun or other strong light sources for extended periods when using or  
storing the camera. Intense light may cause deterioration of the CCD image sensor, producing a white  
blur effect in photographs.  
B Keep away from strong magnetic fields  
Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic  
radiation or magnetic fields. Strong static charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment  
such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor, damage data stored on the memory card,  
or affect the product’s internal circuitry.  
B Avoid sudden changes in temperature  
Sudden changes in temperature, such as when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day,  
can cause condensation to form inside the device. To prevent condensation, place the device in a  
carrying case or a plastic bag before exposing it to sudden changes in temperature.  
B Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source  
Do not remove the battery while the product is on, or while images are being recorded or deleted.  
Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product  
memory or internal circuitry.  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Caring for the Camera  
C The Battery  
Check the battery level when taking the camera out, and charge the battery if necessary. Do not  
continue charging once the battery is fully charged, as this will result in reduced battery  
performance. If possible, carry a fully-charged spare battery when taking pictures on important  
occasions.  
Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0 °C (32 °F) or above 40 °C (104 °F). Failure  
to observe this precaution could damage the battery or impair its performance.  
Charge the battery in an indoor environment that is between 5 and 35 °C (41 to 95 °F).  
When the battery temperature is between 0 and 10 °C (32 to 50 °F) or 45 to 60 °C (113 to 140 °F),  
the chargeable capacity may decrease. The battery will not charge if its temperature is below 0 °C  
(32 °F) or above 60 °C (140 °F).  
If an exhausted battery is used at a low temperature, the camera may not turn on. Be sure that the  
battery is fully charged and spare batteries are prepared before heading outside to take pictures in  
cold weather. Keep spare batteries in a warm place and exchange as necessary. Once warmed, a  
cold battery that could not be used temporarily due to lowered performance may recover some of  
its charge.  
Should the battery terminals become dirty, the camera may not turn on due to poor contact. Wipe  
the terminals off with a clean, dry cloth before use.  
Recharge it at least once every six months and run it flat before returning it to storage. Attach the  
included terminal cover to the battery and store it in a cool location with an ambient temperature  
of 15 to 25 °C (59 to 77 °F). Do not store the battery in hot or extremely cold locations.  
While the battery is in storage, charge it at least once every six months and then use the camera to  
run it flat again before storing it in a cool location.  
Always remove the battery from the camera or battery charger when it is not being used. Left  
installed, minute amounts of current flow even when unused, and the battery may become  
excessively drained and no longer function.  
A marked drop in the time a fully-charged battery retains its charge, when used at room  
temperature, indicates that the battery needs to be replaced. Purchase a new battery.  
Replace the battery when it no longer holds a charge. Used batteries are a valuable resource. Please  
recycle used batteries in accordance with local regulations.  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Caring for the Camera  
Cleaning  
Avoid touching glass parts with your fingers. Remove dust or lint with a  
blower (typically a small device with a rubber bulb attached to one end that  
is pumped to produce a stream of air out the other end). To remove  
fingerprints or other stains that cannot be removed with a blower, wipe the  
lens with a soft cloth, using a spiral motion that starts at the center of the  
lens and working toward the edges. If this fails, clean the lens using a cloth  
lightly dampened with commercial lens cleaner.  
Lens/  
viewfinder  
Remove dust or lint with a blower. To remove fingerprints and other stains,  
clean the monitor with a soft, dry cloth, being careful not to apply pressure.  
Monitor  
Body  
Use a blower to remove dust, dirt or sand, then wipe gently with a soft, dry  
cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or  
salt with a dry cloth lightly dampened with fresh water, then dry  
thoroughly. Note that foreign matter inside the camera could cause  
damage not covered by the warranty.  
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Caring for the Camera  
Storage  
Turn the camera off when not in use. Check that the power-on lamp is off before  
putting the camera away. Remove the battery if the camera will not be used for an  
extended period. Do not store the camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls, or  
in any of the following locations:  
Next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields, such as  
televisions or radios  
Exposed to temperatures below -10 °C (14 °F) or above 50 °C (122 °F)  
Poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60 %  
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once a month.  
Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before putting the camera  
away again.  
C Notes on the Monitor  
The monitor may contain a few pixels that are always lit or that do not light. This is a characteristic  
common to all TFT LCD displays, and does not indicate a malfunction. Images recorded using the  
product will not be affected.  
Images on the monitor may be difficult to see under bright lighting.  
The monitor is lit by an LED backlight. Should the monitor begin to dim or flicker, contact your  
Nikon-authorized service representative.  
White or colored streaks of light may be visible on the monitor with framing of bright subjects. This  
phenomenon, known as “smear,” occurs when extremely bright light strikes the image sensor. This  
is due to characteristics of the image sensor and does not indicate a malfunction. Smear may also  
cause partial discoloration in monitor display with shooting. Smear does not affect recorded  
images except when shooting with Continuous set to Multi-shot 16 and when recording  
movies. When shooting in these modes, avoiding bright objects such as the sun, reflections of the  
sun, and electric lights is recommended.  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Technical Notes and Index  
Optional Accessories  
Rechargeable  
battery  
Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14  
Battery charger  
Battery Charger MH-24*  
AC Adapter EH-5a (connect as shown) and Power Connector EP-5A  
(connect as shown)  
When the Power Connector is inserted into the camera and the AC  
Adapter is connected, the camera can be powered from an electrical  
outlet.  
The AC Adapter and the Power Connector are available separately.  
1
2
3
AC adapter/Power  
connector  
Before closing the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover, fully  
insert the cord of the power connector into the slot in the battery  
chamber. If part of the cord runs out of the groove, the cover or cord  
may be damaged when the cover is closed.  
Insert the DC plug of the AC Adapter EH-5a into the DC plug  
connector of the Power Connector EP-5A.  
USB cable  
USB Cable UC-E6  
Audio/Video cable Audio Video Cable EG-CP16  
Wide-angle Converter WC-E75A (0.75×)  
(requires Adapter Ring UR-E22)  
Converter lens  
Lens adapter ring  
Speedlights  
Adapter Ring UR-E22  
Speedlight SB-400, SB-600, SB-900  
(external flash unit) Wireless Speedlight Commander SU-800  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                               
Optional Accessories  
Remote Control ML-L3  
How to replace the battery (3 V CR2025 lithium battery) in the remote  
control.  
Remote control  
When changing the remote control battery, be sure that the  
battery’s positive (+) and negative (-) terminals are oriented  
correctly.  
Be sure to read and follow the warnings for the battery on page iii  
and the section, “The Battery” (A196).  
* When using in other countries, use a commercially available plug adapter as  
necessary. For more information about plug adapters, consult your travel agency.  
See our websites or product catalogs for up-to-date information on accessories for  
the COOLPIX P7000.  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Optional Accessories  
B Converter and Adapter Ring  
Be sure to set Wide-angle converter (A104) to On.  
Do not attach lens hoods or filters to the converter lens or adapter ring, as they may cause shading  
around the edges of pictures.  
B External Flash  
The accessory shoe for the COOLPIX P7000 is compatible with Nikon Speedlights SB-400, SB-600 and  
SB-900, and the Wireless Speedlight Commander SU-800. Attempting to attach other external flashes  
may damage the camera and the external flash.  
B Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories  
Use only Nikon Speedlights. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V applied to the accessory shoe  
could not only prevent normal operation, but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash.  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Optional Accessories  
Using Speedlights (External Flash Unit)  
The camera is equipped with an accessory shoe, allowing Speedlights SB-400, SB-  
600 or SB-900 (available separately) to be mounted on the camera. Use Speedlights  
for indirect lighting or when additional lighting is required. The built-in flash is  
changed to W(Off) automatically when using Speedlights. While p is displayed on  
the monitor, the Speedlight flash mode is also displayed on the monitor, and it can  
be set with the same procedure as the built-in flash (A32).  
Remove the accessory shoe cover before attaching a  
Speedlight unit as shown on the right.  
When the built-in flash is raised, gently push to lower the  
flash until it clicks shut.  
Refer to the Speedlight manual for more information on  
how to attach Speedlight and details on how to use it.  
Replace the accessory shoe cover when the Speedlight is not in use.  
D Speedlights SB-400, SB-600 and SB-900  
Before using Speedlights SB-600 or SB-900, set the Speedlight flash control mode to TTL. This  
enables the i-TTL flash control to use monitor pre-flashes to adjust flash output automatically in  
response to lighting conditions. Refer to the Speedlight manual for more information on i-TTL flash  
control.  
Wireless multiple flash shooting can be performed by setting the SB-900 or Wireless Speedlight  
Commander SU-800 to “commander,” and setting the SB-600 and SB-900 to “remote flash.”  
However, the flash is not usable even if the monitor pre-flashes are fired when the SB-900 is set to  
“commander.”  
The Wireless multiple flash group setting is only applicable to group A. Change the setting for both  
the commander and the remote flash to group A. Refer to the Speedlight manual for more  
information.  
When wireless multiple flash shooting, if ISO sensitivity is set to Auto, High ISO sensitivity auto,  
ISO 100-200 or ISO 100-400, it is fixed to ISO 100.  
The camera does not support Flash Color Information Communication, Auto FP High-Speed Sync,  
FV lock, or AF-assist for multi-area AF when using Speedlights SB-600 or SB-900.  
Power zoom function can be used with Speedlights SB-600 or SB-900, setting zoom head position  
automatically depending upon focal length.  
When using Speedlights SB-600 or SB-900, the edges of pictures shot at ranges under 2 m (6 ft. 7  
in.) on the zoom wide-angle side may appear dark. In such cases, use the wide panel.  
When set to STBY (standby), the Speedlight turns on and off at the same time as the camera.  
Confirm on the Speedlight that the Ready-light is on.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
202  
       
File and Folder Names  
Pictures, movies and voice memos are assigned file names as follows.  
DSCN0001.JPG  
Identifier (not shown on camera monitor)  
Original still pictures (voice  
Extension (signifies the file type)  
Still pictures .JPG  
RAW still pictures .NRW  
memo attachment  
included), movies  
DSCN  
Movies  
.MOV  
.WAV  
Small copies (voice memo  
attachment included)  
SSCN  
RSCN  
Voice memos  
Cropped copies (voice  
memo attachment included)  
File number (assigned automatically in  
ascending order, starting with “0001”)  
Pictures created with picture  
editing other than cropping  
and small picture and  
attached voice memos,  
movies created with movie  
editing  
FSCN  
A folder for storing files is automatically created using the following naming  
convention: “Folder number + NIKON” (e.g., “100NIKON”). If there are 200 files in  
a folder, a new folder is created. (For example, the folder name following  
“100NIKON” becomes “101NIKON.”) A new folder is also created when the file  
numbers in a folder reach 9999 or Reset file numbering (A188) is performed.  
The next file number is set automatically to “0001.”  
If a folder contains no files, a new folder is not created even if Reset file  
numbering is performed.  
When images are shot with an Image quality (A68) setting of NRW (RAW) +  
Fine, NRW (RAW) + Normal or NRW (RAW) + Basic, the NRW (RAW) and JPEG  
images that are recorded at the same time are assigned the same file name. The  
NRW (RAW) and JPEG images that are recorded at the same time are saved in the  
same folder. If there are 199 files in a folder, a new folder is created and the images  
are saved in the new folder.  
Voice memo file names have the same identifier and file number as the picture  
to which the voice memo is attached.  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
File and Folder Names  
In Panorama assist (A55), a folder is created for each shooting session using the  
following naming convention: “Folder number + P_XXX” (e.g., “101P_001”).  
Pictures are saved in sequence in file numbers starting from 0001.  
Each time a picture is taken in Interval timer shooting (A99), a folder named  
with the convention: 'Folder number + INTVL' (e.g., 101INTVL) is created. Pictures  
are saved in sequence in file numbers starting from 0001.  
When image files or voice files are copied to or from the internal memory or  
memory card (A131), the file naming conventions are as follows:  
-
Files copied using Selected images are copied to the current folder (or to the  
folder used for subsequent pictures), where they are assigned file numbers in  
ascending order following the largest file number in memory.  
Files copied using All images, along with their folder, are copied together.  
Folder numbers are assigned in ascending order, following the largest folder  
number on the destination medium.  
-
File names are not changed.  
When the current folder is numbered 999, if there are 200 files in the folder or if  
a file is numbered 9999, no further pictures can be shot until the internal memory  
or memory card is formatted (A182), or a new memory card is inserted.  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Error Messages  
The following table lists the error messages and other warnings displayed on the  
monitor, as well as the solutions for dealing with them.  
Display  
Description  
Clock not set.  
Battery is running low. Prepare to charge or change battery. 16, 18  
Solution  
A
O
(blinks)  
Set clock.  
B
N
Battery exhausted.  
Charge or change battery.  
Battery exhausted.  
Turn off camera, and allow battery to  
cool down before resuming use. Five  
seconds after this message appears,  
the monitor is turned off, and the  
P
Battery temperature is power-on lamp, the AF lamp and the  
Battery temperature high high.  
flash lamp flicker. After the lamps  
blink for three minutes, the camera  
turns off automatically, but you can  
also press the power switch to turn it  
off manually.  
P
Camera cannot  
perform other  
operations until  
recording is complete.  
Wait until message clears from  
display automatically when  
recording is complete.  
Please wait for the  
camera to finish  
recording.  
N
Write-protect switch is Slide the write-protect switch to  
Memory card is write  
protected.  
in “lock” position.  
“write” position.  
P
Use an approved card.  
Check that connectors are clean. 22  
Confirm that memory card is  
correctly inserted.  
This card cannot be used.  
Error accessing  
memory card.  
P
This card cannot be read.  
All data stored on the memory  
card is deleted when formatted. If  
there is any data on the card that  
you want to keep, select No, and  
backup the data to a computer  
before formatting the memory card.  
To format the memory card, select  
Yes and press the kbutton.  
P
Card is not formatted.  
Format card?  
Yes  
No  
Memory card has not  
beenformatted for use  
in this camera.  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Error Messages  
Display  
Description  
Solution  
A
Choose lower image quality or  
smaller image size.  
Delete pictures and movies.  
N
Memory card is full.  
Out of memory.  
Replace memory card.  
Remove memory card and use  
internal memory.  
Error occurred while  
recording picture.  
Format the internal memory or  
memory card.  
Camera has run out of Replace the memory card, or format  
file numbers.  
the internal memory/memory card.  
The following pictures cannot be  
used.  
NRW (RAW) images  
P
Picture cannot be  
used for welcome  
screen.  
Pictures shot with Image size of 70  
I 3648×2432, z 3584×2016  
or H 2732736  
Pictures created with small picture 137,  
or crop function that are 160×120 145  
or less  
Image cannot be saved.  
There is insufficient  
space to save a copy.  
Delete pictures from destination.  
-
Confirm the conditions that are  
required for editing.  
RAW processing cannot be  
performed for NRW (RAW) pictures  
that were taken with a camera  
other than COOLPIX P7000.  
These options cannot be used with  
movies.  
N
Cannot edit selected  
picture.  
Image cannot be  
modified.  
-
N
Time out error while  
recording movie.  
Choose memory card with faster  
write speed.  
Cannot record movie.  
N
Cannot reset file  
numbering.  
No more folders can  
be created.  
Insert a new memory card, or format 22, 182,  
the internal memory/memory card. 188  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Messages  
Display  
Description  
Solution  
A
Pictures stored in the internal  
memory can only be viewed if no  
memory card is inserted.  
To copy files from internal memory 131  
to memory card, press the d  
button to display the copy screen,  
then copy the files from internal  
memory to memory card.  
N
No pictures in the  
internal memory or  
memory card.  
Memory contains no  
images.  
File cannot be viewed on this camera.  
File not created with View file using the computer or any  
N
File contains no image  
data.  
COOLPIX P7000.  
other devices which was used to  
create or edit this file.  
The picture cannot be  
played back in a slide  
show.  
N
All images in the  
internal memory/  
memory card are  
hidden.  
All images are hidden.  
Disable the Hide image setting to  
view images.  
N
This image cannot be  
deleted.  
Picture is protected.  
Disable protection.  
N
Travel destination is in  
the current time zone.  
Destination in same  
time zone as home.  
P
Mode dial is between Rotate the mode dial to select the  
two modes.  
Mode dial is not in the  
proper position.  
desired mode.  
N
All registered menu  
items cannot be  
changed at the  
current setting.  
Check the settings of functions  
that are not registered in My Menu.  
Change the menu item to be  
registered in My Menu.  
My Menu can not be  
changed at current  
settings.  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Messages  
Display  
Description  
Solution  
A
The built-in flash is  
lowered when the  
scene mode is Night  
portrait or  
N
Press the K(flash pop-up) button 33, 49,  
Press the flash pop-up  
to raise the built-in flash.  
button to raise the flash. Backlighting, or the  
Continuous mode is  
Continuous flash.  
The built-in flash is not Press the K(flash pop-up) button  
N
raised during the  
scene auto selector  
mode.  
to raise the built-in flash. The camera  
can still shoot normally with the flash  
lowered if you do not wish to use it.  
The flash is lowered.  
Group A has not been  
selected for group  
Set the group setting of the master  
commander and remote flash to  
Group A.  
P
Speedlight setting error setting whenshooting  
using wireless lighting.  
Turn camera off and then on again. If  
Q
Lens error  
Lens is not operating error persists, contact retailer or  
properly.  
Nikon-authorized service  
representative.  
Error occurred during  
communication with Turn off camera and reconnect cable.  
printer.  
P
157,  
Communications error  
Turn off camera , remove and reinsert  
Error has occurred in battery, and turn on camera. If the  
System error  
Q
camera’s internal  
circuitry.  
error persists, contact retailer or  
Nikon-authorized service  
representative.  
Q
The camera cannot  
focus.  
Wait until the camera recovers  
automatically.  
Initializing lens. Cannot  
focus.  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Messages  
Display  
Description  
Printer error  
Solution  
A
PR  
Check printer. After solving the  
problem, select Resume and press  
the kbutton to resume printing.*  
Printer error: check  
printer status.  
-
-
-
Load the specified paper size, select  
Resume and press the kbutton to  
resume printing.*  
PR  
Specified paper size is  
Printer error: check paper not loaded.  
Remove the jammed paper, select  
Resume and press the kbutton to  
resume printing.*  
PR  
Paper has jammed in  
Printer error: paper jam the printer.  
Load the specified paper size, select  
Resume and press the kbutton to  
resume printing.*  
PR  
No paper is loaded in  
-
-
-
Printer error: out of paper the printer.  
PR  
Check ink, select Resume and press  
Ink error  
*
Printer error: check ink  
the kbutton to resume printing.  
Replace ink cartridge, select Resume  
PR  
Ink cartridge is empty. and press the kbutton to resume  
Printer error: out of ink  
*
printing.  
An error caused by the  
Select Cancel and press the k  
image file has  
PR  
-
Printer error: file corrupt  
button to cancel printing.  
occurred.  
*
See the documentation provided with your printer for further guidance and information.  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of common problems  
below before consulting your retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative.  
Refer to the page numbers in the right-most column for more information.  
Display, Settings and Power Supply  
Problem  
Cause/Solution  
A
Camera is off.  
Battery is exhausted.  
Standby mode for saving power: Press the power switch, 19, 30  
shutter-release button or the c button, or rotate the  
mode dial.  
Monitor is blank.  
Monitor is turned off. Press the x button to turn it on. 14  
Camera and computer are connected via USB cable.  
Camera and TV are connected via A/V cable or HDMI  
cable.  
Interval timer shooting in progress.  
Ambient lighting too bright: use viewfinder or move to  
darker location.  
Monitor is hard to  
read.  
Adjust monitor brightness.  
Monitor is dirty. Clean monitor.  
Use monitor brightness boost.  
The viewfinder is  
hard to read.  
Adjust diopter adjustment control.  
Battery is exhausted.  
-
Camera has turned off automatically to save power.  
Inside of the camera has become hot. Leave the camera  
off until the inside of the camera has cooled.  
Camera turns off  
without warning.  
At low temperatures, the camera and the battery may not 196  
function normally.  
If the date has not been set (“Date not set” indicator blinks 20, 170  
during shooting), still pictures have a time stamp of “00/  
00/0000 00:00”; and movies are dated “01/01/10 00:00.”  
Set the correct date and time using Date in the setup  
menu.  
Date and time of  
recording are not  
correct.  
The camera clock is not as accurate as a normal clock, such 170  
as watches. Check camera clock regularly against more  
accurate timepieces and reset as required.  
No information  
displayed in  
monitor.  
Shooting data and photo information may be hidden. Press  
the x button until shooting data or photo information is 14  
displayed.  
Date imprint not  
available.  
Date has not been set.  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Date not  
appearing on  
pictures even  
when Date  
imprint is  
Cause/Solution  
A
A shooting mode that does not support date imprint is 174  
selected.  
Another function that is set now is restricting the date  
imprinting.  
The date cannot be imprinted onto a movie.  
-
enabled.  
Camera settings  
reset.  
Clock battery is exhausted; all settings were restored to their  
default values.  
Reset file numbering cannot be applied when the  
folder number reaches 999 and there are images in the  
folder. Change the memory card, or format the internal  
memory/memory card.  
Reset file  
numbering  
cannot be done.  
Reset file numbering cannot be set when the scene  
mode is set to Panorama assist, or when the shooting  
mode is A, B, C, D, E, For Nand Intvl timer  
shooting is chosen for Continuous in the shooting  
menu.  
Battery temperature is high. Turn off camera, and allow  
battery to cool down before resuming use. After the lamp  
blinks for three minutes, the camera turns off automatically, 19  
but you can also press the power switch to turn it off  
manually.  
Monitor is turned  
off, and the power-  
on lamp blinks  
rapidly.  
When functions such as movie recording are used for a long  
time, or when the camera is used in a location with a high  
temperature rises. ambient temperature, the camera temperature may rise. This  
is not a malfunction.  
Camera  
Electronically Controlled Cameras  
In extremely rare instances, unusual characters may appear on the monitor and the  
camera may stop functioning. In most cases, this phenomenon is caused by a strong  
external static charge. Turn the camera off, remove and replace the battery, then turn the  
camera on again. Note that disconnecting the power source as described above may  
result in the loss of any data not recorded on the internal memory or memory card at the  
time the problem occurred. Data already recorded is not affected. In the event of  
continued malfunction, contact your retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative.  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Shooting  
Problem  
Cause/Solution  
Disconnect the audio/video cable, HDMI cable or USB cable. 154, 157, 162  
A
Cannot set to  
shooting mode  
When camera is in playback mode, press the cor  
shutter-release button.  
No picture taken  
when shutter-  
release button is  
pressed.  
When menus are displayed, press the dbutton.  
Battery is exhausted.  
When the scene mode is Night portrait or  
Backlighting, or Continuous in the shooting menu is  
set to Continuous flash, raise the built-in flash.  
When flash lamp blinks, flash is charging.  
The intended subject is one with which autofocus does 29  
not perform well.  
Set AF assist in the setup menu to Auto.  
Subject not in focus area when shutter-release button  
pressed halfway.  
Camera cannot  
focus.  
The focus mode is set to E (manual focus).  
Turn camera off and then on again.  
Use flash.  
Use vibration reduction and motion detection.  
Use D (Best Shot Selector).  
Use a tripod to stabilize the camera (use with the self-  
timer for better results).  
Pictures are  
blurred.  
Streaks of light or Smear occurs when extremely bright light strikes the image  
partial  
sensor. When shooting with Continuous set to Multi-shot 16  
discoloration are  
visible on the  
monitor.  
and when recording movies, avoiding bright objects, such as 198  
the sun, reflections of the sun, and electric lights is  
recommended.  
Bright specks  
appear in pictures Flash is reflecting off particles in air. Set the flash to W(Off). 32  
shot using flash.  
Flash is set to W(Off).  
A scene mode that cannot turn on flash is selected.  
The movie mode is selected.  
Another function that is set now is restricting the flash.  
Built-in flash does not fire when a Speedlight (external  
flash unit) is used.  
Flash does not fire.  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Cause/Solution  
A
On is selected for Wide-angle converter in the shooting 104  
menu.  
When the lens ring is removed while the camera is on, the 104  
zoom is fixed in a wide-angle end. Turn the camera off,  
attach the lens ring, and then turn the camera on again.  
Zoom does not  
operate.  
Off is selected for Digital zoom in the setup menu.  
The digital zoom cannot be used in the following  
situations.  
-
-
-
-
When the focus mode is set to E (manual focus)  
When Subject tracking is selected for AF area mode 85  
When Smile timer is set  
When Scene auto selector, Portrait or Night  
portrait is selected in scene mode  
When Image quality in the quick menu is set to NRW 68  
(RAW), NRW (RAW) + Fine, NRW (RAW) + Normal or  
NRW (RAW) + Basic  
Digital zoom is not  
available.  
-
-
-
When On is selected for Wide-angle converter in the 104  
shooting menu  
When Multi-shot 16 is set for Continuous in the  
shooting menu  
Image size not  
available.  
Another function that is set now is restricting Image size. 108  
Off is selected for Shutter sound under Sound settings 179  
in the setup menu.  
Continuous, BSS, Continuous flash or Multi-shot 16 is 99  
selected for Continuous in the shooting menu.  
A mode other than Off is selected for Auto bracketing in 80  
the quick menu.  
No sound when  
shutter is released.  
Sports or Museum is selected in scene mode.  
The movie mode is selected.  
Do not block the speaker.  
AF-assist  
Off is selected for AF assist in the setup menu. Even when  
illuminator does  
not light.  
Auto is set, AF-assist illuminator may not light depending on 177  
the focus area position or scene mode.  
Pictures appear  
smeared.  
Lens is dirty. Clean lens.  
Colors are  
unnatural.  
White balance does not match light source.  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Cause/Solution  
A
As the subject is dark, shutter speed is too slow or ISO  
sensitivity is too high.  
Randomly spaced  
bright pixels  
(“noise”) appear in  
image.  
Use flash.  
Specify a lower ISO sensitivity setting.  
Apply Long exposure NR in the shooting menu to suit 103  
situations.  
Use a scene mode which has noise reduction.  
Flash is set to W(Off).  
Built-in flash window is blocked.  
Subject is beyond flash range.  
Adjust exposure compensation.  
Raise the ISO sensitivity.  
Subject is backlit. Raise the built-in flash, and set the scene 32, 55  
mode to Backlighting or set the flash mode to (fill flash).  
Pictures are too  
dark  
(underexposed).  
X
On is selected for Built-in ND filter in the setup menu.  
Pictures are too  
bright  
(overexposed).  
Adjust exposure compensation.  
Use Built-in ND filter setting in the setup menu.  
When V(Auto with red-eye reduction) or “fill flash with  
Unexpectedresults slow sync and red-eye reduction” of the Night portrait  
occurred when scene mode is applied during shooting, In-Camera Red-Eye  
flash is set to auto Fix may, in very rare cases, be applied to areas not affected by 32, 49  
with red-eye  
reduction.  
red-eye. Set a flash mode other than V(Auto with red-eye  
reduction), select a scene mode other than Night portrait,  
and resume shooting.  
Skin softening may not produce the desired results  
depending on shooting conditions.  
For pictures with four or more faces, try using Skin  
softening in the playback menu.  
Skin softening  
results are not as  
expected.  
It may take more time to save images in the following  
situations.  
When the noise reduction function is in operation  
When flash is set to V(Auto with red-eye reduction) 32  
When using scene mode Portrait or Night portrait 48, 49  
while shooting  
Saving images  
takes time.  
When using Smile timer while shooting  
When using Active D-Lighting while shooting  
When Image quality is set to NRW (RAW), NRW  
(RAW) + Fine, NRW (RAW) + Normal or NRW  
(RAW) + Basic  
Cannot set or use  
Continuous or  
Auto bracketing.  
Another function that is set now is restricting the  
Continuous setting or Auto bracketing.  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Cannot set  
COOLPIX Picture  
Control.  
Cause/Solution  
A
Another function that is set now is restricting COOLPIX  
Picture Control.  
Playback  
Problem  
Cause/Solution  
A
File was overwritten or renamed by computer or another  
make or model of camera.  
File cannot be  
played back.  
Interval timer shooting in progress.  
NRW (RAW) images or movies recorded with cameras  
other than COOLPIX P7000 cannot be played back.  
Cannot zoom in on Playback zoom cannot be used with movies, small pictures,  
picture.  
or cropped copies of size 320 × 240 pixels and below.  
Voice memos cannot be attached to movies.  
Voice memos cannot be attached to pictures shot by  
cameras other than the COOLPIX P7000, and voice  
memos recorded by other cameras cannot be played  
back.  
Cannot record or  
play back voice  
memo.  
Editing other than Black border cannot be performed on 70  
pictures shot with Image size of 3648×2432  
z 3584×2016, and 2732736  
No editing other than NRW (RAW) processing can be  
performed for pictures in the NRW (RAW) format. To edit  
such pictures, first create JPEG pictures using NRW (RAW)  
processing, and then edit the JPEG pictures.  
I
,
H
.
Pictures and  
movies cannot be  
edited.  
Confirm the conditions that are required for editing.  
Pictures and movies taken with cameras other than  
COOLPIX P7000 cannot be edited.  
Video mode or HDMI is not correctly set in the TV  
settings setup menu.  
Both an HDMI cable and an audio/video cable, or both an 154  
HDMI cable and a USB cable are connected.  
Memory card contains no pictures. Replace memory card. 22  
Remove memory card to play back pictures from internal  
memory.  
Pictures not  
displayed on  
television.  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Cause/Solution  
A
Camera is off.  
Battery is exhausted.  
Nikon Transfer 2  
does not start  
when camera is  
connected to a  
computer.  
USB cable is not correctly connected.  
Camera is not recognized by the computer.  
Confirm that the operating system used is compatible  
with the camera.  
Computer is not set to launch Nikon Transfer 2 automatically. 160  
For more information on Nikon Transfer 2, refer to help  
information contained in ViewNX 2.  
Pictures to be  
printed are not  
displayed.  
Memory card contains no pictures. Replace memory card. 22  
Remove memory card to print pictures from internal  
memory.  
Paper size cannot be selected from the camera in the  
following situations, even for PictBridge compatible printers.  
Use the printer to select page size.  
Cannot select  
paper size with  
camera.  
The paper size selected using the camera is not  
compatible with the printer.  
A printer that automatically sets the paper size is being  
used.  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Nikon COOLPIX P7000 Digital Camera  
Type  
Compact digital camera  
Effective pixels  
Image sensor  
Lens  
10.1 million  
1/1.7-in. type CCD; approx. 10.39 million total pixels  
7.1× optical zoom, NIKKOR lens  
6.0-42.6mm (angle of view equivalent to that of 28-200 mm lens in  
35mm [135] format)  
Focal length  
f/-number  
f/2.8-5.6  
Construction  
11 elements in 9 groups  
Up to 4× (angle of view equivalent to that of approx. 800 mm lens  
in 35mm [135] format)  
Digital zoom  
Vibration reduction  
Autofocus (AF)  
Lens shift  
Contrast-detect AF  
Approx. 50 cm (1 ft. 8 in.) to (wide-angle side), approx. 80  
cm (2 ft. 8 in.) to (telephoto side)  
Macro close-up mode: Approx. 2 cm (0.8 in.) to (wide-angle  
side of the G icon)  
Focus range (from  
lens)  
Face priority, auto (9-area automatic selection), center (wide,  
normal, spot), manual with 99 focus areas, subject tracking  
Real-image optical viewfinder, with diopter adjustment  
function  
Focus-area selection  
Viewfinder  
Approx. 80% horizontal and 80% vertical (compared to actual  
picture)  
7.5cm (3-in.), approx. 921k-dot, TFT LCD monitor with anti-  
reflection coating and 5-level brightness adjustment  
Frame coverage  
Monitor  
Frame coverage  
(shooting mode)  
Approx. 97% horizontal and 97% vertical (compared to actual  
picture)  
Frame coverage  
(playback mode)  
Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical (compared to actual  
picture)  
Storage  
Internal memory (approx. 79 MB),  
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory card  
Media  
File system  
DCF, Exif 2.2, and DPOF compliant  
Still pictures: JPEG, NRW (RAW)  
RAW and JPEG can be recorded simultaneously  
File formats  
Sound files (Voice Memo): WAV  
Movies: MOV (Video: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, Audio: AAC stereo)  
10 M  
5 M  
2 M  
PC  
3:2  
1:1  
3648×2736  
2592×1944  
1600×1200  
1024×768  
3648×2432  
2732736  
8 M  
3 M  
1 M  
VGA  
16:9  
3264×2448  
2048×1536  
1280×960  
640×480  
Image size  
(pixels)  
3584×2016  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Specifications  
ISO 100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, Hi 1 (equivalent to 6400)  
Auto (auto gain from ISO 100 to 800)  
High ISO Sensitivity auto (ISO 100 to 1600)  
Fixed range auto (ISO 100 to 200, 100 to 400)  
Low noise night mode (ISO 400 to 12800)  
ISO sensitivity  
(Standard output  
sensitivity)  
Exposure  
Metering  
256-segment matrix, center-weighted, spot, spot AF area (with  
support for 99 focus areas)  
Programmed auto exposure with flexible program, shutter  
priority auto, aperture-priority auto, manual, exposure  
bracketing (Tv), exposure bracketing (Sv), motion detection,  
exposure compensation  
Exposure control  
(–3.0 to +3.0 EV in steps of 1/3 EV)  
Shutter  
Speed  
Mechanical and charge-coupled electronic shutter  
1/2000 - 8 s (A, B mode)  
1/4000 - 8 s (C mode)  
1/4000 - 60 s (D mode)  
4 s (Fireworks show scene mode)  
Aperture  
Electronically-controlled 6-blade iris diaphragm  
10 steps of 1/3 EV  
Range  
Self-timer  
Built-in flash  
Range (approx.)  
Durations of 2 or 10 seconds can be selected  
[W]: 0.5 to 6.5 m (1 ft. 8 in. to 21 ft.)  
(ISO sensitivity: Auto) [T]: 0.8 to 3 m (2 ft. 8 in. to 9 ft. 10 in.)  
Flash control  
Accessory shoe  
Interface  
TTL auto flash with monitor preflashes  
ISO 518 hot-shoe contact with sync and data contacts and  
safety lock  
Hi-Speed USB  
Data transfer protocol MTP, PTP  
Video output  
I/O terminal  
Can be selected from NTSC and PAL  
Audio/video output; digital I/O (USB); HDMI Mini Connector  
(HDMI output), External microphone connector (Stereo mini-  
pin jack (3.5 mm diameter), input impedance 2 kΩ, sensitivity  
-42 dB or less, plug-in power type)  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifications  
Arabic, Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), Czech, Danish,  
Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,  
Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Norwegian, Polish,  
Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish, Thai, Turkish  
Supported languages  
Power sources  
One Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14 (supplied)  
AC Adapter EH-5a (used in combination with the Power  
Connector EP-5A) (available separately)  
Battery life  
(EN-EL14)  
Still pictures*: Approx. 350 shots  
Movies: Approx. 2 h 45 min (HD 720p (1280×720))  
Tripod socket  
1/4 (ISO 1222)  
Dimensions  
(W × H × D)  
Approx. 114.2 × 77 × 44.8 mm (4.5 × 3.1 × 1.8 in.) (excluding  
projections)  
Weight  
Approx. 360 g (12.7 oz) (with battery and SD memory card)  
Operating environment  
Temperature  
Humidity  
0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F)  
85% and below (no condensation)  
Unless otherwise stated, all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged  
Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14 operated at an ambient temperature of  
25 °C (77 °F).  
*
Based on Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standards for measuring the life  
of camera batteries. Measured at 23 ( 2) °C (73 ( 4) °F); zoom adjusted with each shot, flash  
fired with every other shot, Image quality set to Normal, Image size set to M 3648×2736.  
Battery life may vary depending on shooting interval and length of time menus and images  
are displayed.  
Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14  
Type  
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery  
Rated capacity  
Operating temperature  
DC 7.4 V, 1030 mAh  
0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F)  
Dimensions  
(W × H × D)  
Approx. 38 × 53 × 14 mm (1.5 × 2.1 × 0.6 in.) (excluding  
projections)  
Weight  
Approx. 48 g (1.7 oz) (excluding terminal cover)  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Battery Charger MH-24  
Rated input  
AC 100 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.2 A max.  
18 to 24 VA  
Rated capacity  
Rated output  
DC 8.4 V, 0.9 A  
Supported rechargeable  
battery  
Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14  
Charging time  
Approx. 1 hour and 30 minutes when no charge remains  
0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F)  
Operating temperature  
Dimensions  
(W × H × D)  
Approx. 70 × 26 × 97 mm (2.8 × 1.0 × 3.8 in.)  
Approx. 89 g (3.1 oz), excluding plug adapter  
Weight  
B Specifications  
Nikon will not be held liable for any errors this manual may contain.  
The appearance of this product and its specifications are subject to change without notice.  
Supported Standards  
DCF: Design Rule for Camera File System is a standard widely used in the digital  
camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes of camera.  
DPOF: Digital Print Order Format is an industry-wide standard that allows  
pictures to be printed at a digital photo lab or with a household printer from print  
orders stored on the memory card.  
Exif version 2.2: This camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format for  
Digital Still Cameras) version 2.2, a standard that allows information stored with  
photographs to be used for optimal color reproduction when images are output  
from Exif-compliant printers.  
PictBridge: A standard developed cooperatively by the digital camera and  
printer industries, allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer without  
connecting the camera to a computer.  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Specifications  
Approved Memory Cards  
The following Secure Digital (SD) memory cards have been tested and approved for  
use in this camera.  
When recording a movie onto a memory card, a memory card with an SD speed  
class of Class 6 or higher is recommended. If the transfer speed of the card is slow,  
the movie recording may end unexpectedly.  
2
3
SD memory cards  
SDHC memory cards  
SDXC memory cards  
1
SanDisk  
2 GB  
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB 64 GB  
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB 64 GB  
4 GB, 8 GB, 12 GB,  
1
TOSHIBA  
2 GB  
1
Panasonic  
Lexar  
2 GB  
48 GB, 64 GB  
16 GB, 24 GB, 32 GB  
1
2 GB  
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB  
-
1
2
Before using a card reader or similar device, check that the device supports 2 GB cards.  
SDHC-compliant. Before using a card reader or similar device, check that the  
device supports SDHC.  
3
SDXC-compliant. Before using a card reader or similar device, check that the  
device supports SDXC.  
Contact the manufacturer for details on the above cards.  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Index  
Symbols  
B
C
A
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
Functions that cannot be applied  
D
H
I
E
F
L
M
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Q
R
N
O
S
P
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part  
(except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be  
made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.  
Printed in Japan  
FX0I02(11)  
© 2010 Nikon Corporation  
6MM83111-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Minolta Printer PS7000 User Manual
Muratec Fax Machine IF 200 User Manual
National Instruments Barcode Reader SC 2043 SG User Manual
National Instruments Computer Hardware NI PXI PCI 5114 User Manual
NEC Drill 0724 20 User Manual
Nilfisk Advance America Air Cleaner Nilfisk OZ 1 User Manual
Oki Printer 58374501 User Manual
Omnimount Indoor Furnishings OM1100298 User Manual
Onkyo Stereo Receiver TX SV535 User Manual
OWI Portable Speaker LGS470 User Manual